What's new in ArcGIS 10.2.2 ArcGIS 10.2.2 is predominately a quality improvement release. For a list of issues that are fixed in 10.2.2, see 10.2.2 Issues Addressed List. There is some new functionality in ArcGIS for Server and Portal for ArcGIS. See the following topics for information on what's new in those products: What's new in ArcGIS 10.2.2 for Server What's new in Portal for ArcGIS 10.2.2 What's new in ArcGIS 10.2.1 What's New ArcGIS 10.2.1 includes new functionality throughout the ArcGIS platform. That functionality is summarized in the following sections: Geoprocessing There are a number of new tools, improvements to existing tools, and new ArcPy functions at ArcGIS 10.2.1. Highlights Following are a few new tools and improvements of particular interest. Other new tools and improvements can be found in the toolbox sections below. Renaming fields The new Alter Field Properties tool allows you to rename a field and change its alias. The input table must be a geodatabase table or feature class; shapefiles and coverages cannot have their field properties altered. Near, Generate Near Table, and geodesic distance The Generate Near Table and Near tools have been completely rewritten to be dramatically faster and they now have an optional Method parameter that determines how distances are computed. When Method is set to GEODESIC, distances are calculated across the earth's surface. This is most accurate when the distance between features is large and you want to minimize the distortion Inherent in all projected coordinate systems, particularly in projections like Web Mercator. When PLANAR, Euclidean distances are calculated using the coordinates of the features and is appropriate for projections that minimize distance distortion or when the distance between features is small. The improvements made to Generate Near Table have not yet been implemented for the Point Distance tool. In most workflows, you can use Generate Near Tablein place of Point Distance. New conflation tools The Editing toolbox now has a new Conflation toolset with five new tools for edge matching and rubber sheeting. Tools Description Edgematch Features Modifies input line features by spatially adjusting their shapes, guided by the specified edgematch links, so they become connected with the lines in the adjacent dataset. Generate Edgematch Links Finds matching but disconnected line features along the edges of the source data's area and its adjacent data's area, and generates edgematch links from the source lines to the matched adjacent lines. Generate Rubbersheet Links Finds where the source line features spatially match the target line features and generates lines representing links from source locations to corresponding target locations for rubbersheeting. Rubbersheet Features Modifies input line features by spatially adjusting them through rubbersheeting, using the specified rubbersheet links, so they are better aligned with the intended target features. Transfer Attributes Finds where the source line features spatially match the target line features and transfers specified attributes from source features to matched target features. Tools in the Conflation toolset In addition to these five new tools, the Data Comparison toolset in the Data Management toolbox has a new Detect Feature Changes tool that is useful in conflation workflows. Similarity Search The Spatial Statistics toolbox has one new tool, Similarity Search that identifies which candidate features are most similar or most dissimilar to one or more input features based on feature attributes. Add Geometry Attributes The Add Geometry Attributes tool adds new attribute fields to the input features representing the spatial or geometric characteristics and location of each feature, such as length or area and x-, y-, z-, and m-coordinates. Geoprocessing services You can find geoprocessing services when searching ArcGIS Online and open the link to the service. Opening the link will add the geoprocessing service as a toolbox to the ArcToolbox window. 3D Analyst toolbox The following tools now support the LAS dataset: Stack Profile Surface Aspect Surface Contour Surface Slope The default resampling technique for the following tools has been changed from Nearest Neighbor to Bilinear interpolation: Raster Surface toolset: Aspect, Contour, Contour List, Curvature, Cut Fill, Hillshade, Slope. Visibility toolset: Observer Points, Viewshed, Visibility Data Management toolbox New tools Migrate Relationship Class tool is used to prepare your relationship class or attachment to participate in feature services that will be used in offline editing workflows. See Authoring feature services for information on preparing data for offline use. The Data Comparison toolset has one new tool: Detect Feature Changes As mentioned in the highlights section above: The Fields toolset has the new Alter Field Properties tool for renaming fields and their alias. The Features toolset has the new Add Geometry Attributes tool adds new attribute fields to the input features representing the spatial or geometric characteristics and location of each feature. The Geometric network toolset has three new tools: Find Disconnected Features In Geometric NetworkVerify And Repair Geometric Network ConnectivityRebuild Geometric Network The Versions toolset has two new tools for version conflict management: Add Field Conflict FilterRemove Field Conflict Filter The Raster toolset has two new tools: Export Mosaic Dataset GeometryExport Mosaic Dataset Items Editing toolbox New tools As described in the highlights section above, there is a new Conflation toolset containing five new tools: Edgematch FeaturesGenerate Edgematch LinksGenerate Rubbersheet LinksRubbersheet FeaturesTransfer Attributes Geostatistical Analyst toolbox Improvements have been made to the Empirical Bayesian Kriging, and GA Layer to Contour tools. For more information, see the Extensions section below. Network Analyst toolbox New tools The Server toolset has a new tool: Find Closest Facilities Tools with new parameters Update Traffic Data has a new Speed Unit parameter so you don't need to convert your traffic feed data into miles per hour. Spatial Statistics toolbox New tools As described in the highlights section above, the Mapping Clusters toolset has one new tool: Similarity Search Spatial Analyst toolbox A new Rescale by Function tool has been added to the Reclass toolset. Improvements have been made to the Kernel Density and Point Density tools. The default resampling technique for all the Surface tools (except for Contour with Barriers) has been changed from Nearest Neighbor to Bilinear interpolation. For more information, see the Extensions section below. Python and ArcPy ArcGIS 10.2.1 has been upgraded to include Python 2.7.5. Third-party Python libraries have also been upgraded: NumPy has been upgraded to 1.7.1 and matplotlib to 1.3.0. ArcPy geometry objects now support cut, measureOnLine, snapToLine, and queryPointAndDistance methods. Previously existing geometry methodsgetArea and getLength now have an optional units argument to control the units the values will be calculated in. Geodata Geodatabases and databases New tools are available to work with geometric networks As mentioned in the Geoprocessing section, three new tools have been added to help discover and correct invalid data within a geometric network: Find Disconnected Features In Geometric Network Verify And Repair Geometric Network Connectivity Rebuild Geometric Network All three tools can be found in the Geometric Network toolset of the Data Management toolbox. In addition, the Verify Connectivity and Repair Connectivity commands on the Geometric Network Editing toolbar in ArcMap now have the option to be run against the geometric network features within the current extent of the map to perform more exhaustive checks on those features. These checks are limited to an extent because they compare the geometric coincidence of network features with the logical connectivity and, therefore, take more time to complete. New version conflict management tools and functionality are available Buttons have been added to the Conflict Management dialog box that allow you to view only those fields in conflict. For more information, see A quick tour of reviewing conflicts. Also new for version conflict management at ArcGIS 10.2.1 are the following two geoprocessing tools, which provide the ability to filter specific fields during conflict detection if the Define Conflicts by Attribute setting is used during the reconcile process. These tools can be found in the Versions toolset of the Data Management toolbox. Add Field Conflict Filter Remove Field Conflict Filter You can use the new ListFieldConflictFilters ArcPy function to determine which fields have conflict filters. New database version and operating system support Support has been added to connect to new versions of IBM DB2, PostgreSQL, and Oracle from ArcGIS 10.2.1. For information on supported database versions, see the ArcGIS RDBMS system requirements pages. Also beginning with ArcGIS 10.2.1, you can connect from ArcGIS for Server on a Linux box to a DB2 database on the z operating system. Raster You can now view Landsat 8 data in its native format. The Landsat 8 raster type allows you to ingest Landsat 8 data into your mosaic dataset. The Landsat 8 raster product allows you add layers, that are processed on-the-fly, into the display. There two new raster geoprocessing tools: Tool name Description Export Mosaic Dataset Items Outputs all or selected processed mosaic dataset items to a specified folder and format. Export Mosaic Dataset Geometry Outputs the footprint, boundary, and seamlines of a mosaic dataset to feature classes. Additionally, there are existing geoprocessing tools that have new parameters added: Tool name New parameters Register Raster Maximum RMS Split Raster Split Polygon Feature Class, Clip Type, and Template Extent There is a new raster function available: Function name Description Binary thresholding Convert your raster into foreground and background values, based on the Otsu algorithm. Lidar - LAS Optimizer Utility The LAS Optimizer improves archiving, sharing, and use of LAS format lidar. This freely available utility provides compression and decompression capabilities, leading to significant reduction in LAS file size. Anyone, with or without ArcGIS, can take advantage of this technology. Licensed ArcGIS users have the added benefit of being able to work with Optimized LAS files (*.zlas) directly in ArcGIS without needing to decompress them first by adding them to a LAS Dataset. The optimized LAS files also include statistics and spatial indexes that regular LAS files don't have, so they're actually easier and more efficient to use. Since optimized LAS files are indexed, queries to retrieve data from them are significantly more efficient than regular LAS. The LAS Optimizer utility can be found on the 3D GIS community gallery. CAD Direct-read support has been certified for the AutoCAD 2014 DWG drawing file format, software version 19.1. This DWG file format was introduced by Autodesk for all AutoCAD 2013 and AutoCAD 2014 related products and is a critical format for customers who work with AutoCAD source data. Metadata A new ISO 19139 metadata style is available that exports XML files that reference the GML 3.2.1 namespace and validates with XML Schemas that also reference this namespace. For more information about this new style, see Support for ISO metadata standards. Shapefiles Shapefiles created with ArcGIS 10.2.1 and subsequent releases use UTF-8 encoding. This allows you to share shapefiles across computers with different locale settings. Geocoding Single-field batch geocoding In addition to geocoding a table of addresses in multiple fields, you can geocode addresses that are stored in a single field. A single input field stores the complete address, for example, 303 Peachtree St NE, Atlanta GA 30308. See Geocoding a table of addresses in ArcMap or Geocode Addresses geoprocessing tool. Zooming to found locations Zooming to the predefined area of the found location is supported in the Find dialog box, Geocoding toolbar, or Interactive Rematch dialog box. This feature is possible when predefined x,y minimums and maximums exist for each feature from the reference data. See Understanding address locator styles. Local search on a specified proximity Local search is enabled when you zoom in to the map on a radius that is less than 50,000 meters when using the ArcGIS Online World Geocoding service in ArcMap. ArcGIS sorts the candidates based on the proximity to the center of the map. The priority of candidates within this area is boosted relative to those outside the area. If no candidates are found in the area, candidates outside the area are searched. Locator as ArcGIS Runtime content By enabling the locator to work with ArcGIS Runtime, your Runtime applications can geocode against the locator, including when disconnected from the Internet. Services For a summary of what new and improved functionality is available in ArcGIS 10.2.1 for Server and ArcGIS 10.2.1 Web Adaptor, see What's new in ArcGIS 10.2.1 for Server. For Portal for ArcGIS, see What's new in Portal for ArcGIS 10.2.1. Extensions ArcGIS Geostatistical Analyst extension Empirical Bayesian Kriging now supports additional semivariogram models. These additional models will allow more accurate modeling of data with different spatial properties. The performance of GA Layer to Contour tool has been improved by utilizing multiple computer cores. The contouring algorithm for drawing geostatistical layers has been made parallel to utilize multiple computer cores. This will be most noticeable when using Empirical Bayesian Kriging. ArcGIS Network Analyst extension ArcGIS Online network services If you don't have access to reliable street data or a Network Analyst license, or even to ArcGIS for Desktop, it's still possible to perform network analyses by using ArcGIS Online services. The ArcGIS Online network services reference a continually growing, worldwide dataset of streets, which Esri and its partners curate. Use an organizational account and the Ready-To-Use Services in ArcMap to generate service areas, find closest facilities, route one vehicle at a time, or route an entire fleet of up to 100 vehicles to optimally service as many as 20,000 orders. (The Ready-To-Use Services are available in the Catalog window in ArcGIS 10.2 for Desktop and later releases.) If you seek a simple solution or don't have access to ArcMap, solve network problems in your web browser. With an organizational account, you can perform analysis in the ArcGIS.com Viewer, including generating drive- time areas and finding what's nearest in terms of driving time or driving distance. ArcGIS Runtime transportation networks Route vehicles on mobile devices, even when disconnected from the Internet, by using ArcGIS Runtime and transportation networks. ArcGIS 10.2.1 lets you package a network dataset into a transportation network, which you can distribute with your Runtime application to support offline routing. By also including a Runtime-enabled locator, your offline users can find addresses or other locations and route between them. Network Analyst Tools Toolbox Find Closest Facilities was added to the Network Analyst Tool toolbox to make it easier to create services to find the nearest facilities, such as restaurants, hospitals, and ATMs. Generate Service Areas and Find Closest Facilities have a Time Zone Usage parameter that lets you choose between specifying UTC times or times based on the time zone in which the input points are located. Network Analyst Python module GenerateDirectionsFeatures, a new function in the Network Analyst Python module, produces text directions as a feature class that pairs each piece of the text direction with a corresponding line feature on the map. Use the output feature class to visualize turns and other maneuvers. Also,StreetDirectionProperties lets you learn what languages, units, and so on are available for directions so it's easier to work with and generate language- and region-specific directions. ArcGIS Spatial Analyst extension New tools for Spatial Analyst There is a new tool in the Reclass toolset for reclassification of continuous raster data. It rescales the input raster values by applying linear and nonlinear transformation functions and then transforming the resulting function values onto a specified continuous evaluation scale. Rescale by Function Spatial Analyst Python module A set of new Transformation Function ArcPy classes has been added to support the new Rescale by Function tool. Improved Density tools The Kernel Density and Point Density tools have an improved method for calculating the default radius. Improved Surface tools For the tools in the Surface toolset, the default resampling method is changed from Nearest Neighbor to Bilinear. This is to give improved results when analyzing continuous raster surfaces. Data Interoperability extension The Data Interoperability Extension now supports Safe Software’s Feature Manipulation Engine 2013 SP1 (FME 2103 SP1). FME 2103 SP1 includes enhanced support for additional column types in Excel and reading and writing of the Salesforce data format. Apps See these topics for new functionality in apps: Operations Dashboard for ArcGIS Collector for ArcGIS ArcGIS app for smartphones and tablets (Android, iOS, Windows Phone) ArcGIS for Windows Mobile ArcPad SDKs and APIs New software development kits (SDKs) released since ArcGIS 10.2 include: ArcGIS Runtime SDK for OS X ArcGIS Runtime SDK for .NET ArcGIS Runtime SDK for Qt See these topics for what's new in existing mobile and Runtime SDKs: ArcGIS Runtime SDK for Android ArcGIS Runtime SDK for iOS ArcGIS Runtime SDK for Java (Windows and Linux) ArcGIS Runtime SDK for Windows Mobile (previously ArcGIS Mobile SDK) ArcGIS Runtime SDK for Windows Phone ArcGIS Runtime SDK for WPF (for Windows) ArcPad (includes what's new for developers) See the following topics for information on what's new in Web APIs: ArcGIS API for Flex ArcGIS API for JavaScript ArcGIS API for Silverlight For information on changes and new features for REST developers, see: ArcGIS REST specification I. INTRODUCTION 1.Mapping and visualization in ArcGIS for Desktop Desktop » Mapping ArcGIS for Desktop has three applications that can be used for mapping and visualization: ArcMap is the main application used in ArcGIS for Desktop for mapping, editing, analysis, and data management. ArcMap is used for all 2D mapping work and visualization. See What is ArcMap? for more information. ArcGlobe is used for seamless 3D visualization of geographic data using a continuous global view. This application is generally designed to be used with very large datasets that are displayed using varying levels of detail. ArcGlobe is part of the optional ArcGIS 3D Analyst extension. ArcScene is used for 3D visualization of focused scenes or areas. It creates a 3D scene view that you can navigate and interact with for enclosed areas of interest. ArcScene is also part of the ArcGIS 3D Analyst extension. See Working with ArcScene and ArcGlobe to learn more about the ArcGIS for Desktop applications which allow you to visualize data in a 3D environment. The remainder of this help book provides extensive documentation on using ArcMap. The links above will take you to help for ArcScene and ArcGlobe. 2.What is ArcMap? Desktop » Mapping This section provides an introduction and overview to ArcMap, which is the central application used in ArcGIS. ArcMap is where you display and explore GIS datasets for your study area, where you assign symbols, and where you create map layouts for printing or publication. ArcMap is also the application you use to create and edit datasets. ArcMap represents geographic information as a collection of layers and other elements in a map. Common map elements include the data frame containing map layers for a given extent plus a scale bar, north arrow, title, descriptive text, a symbol legend, and so on. Typical tasks performed in ArcMap ArcMap is the primary application used in ArcGIS and is used to perform a wide range of common GIS tasks as well as specialized, user-specific tasks. Here is a list of some common workflows you can perform: Work with maps—You can open and use ArcMap documents to explore information, navigate around your map documents, turn layers on and off, query features to access the rich attribute data that is behind the map, and to visualize geographic information. Print maps—You can print maps, from the simplest to very sophisticated cartography, using ArcMap. Compile and edit GIS datasets—ArcMap provides one of the primary ways that users automate geodatabase datasets. ArcMap supports scalable full- functionediting. You select layers in the map document to edit and the new and updated features are saved in the layer's dataset. Use geoprocessing to automate work and perform analysis—GIS is both visual and analytical. ArcMap has the ability to execute any geoprocessing model or script as well as to view and work with the results through map visualization. Geoprocessing can be used for analysis as well as to automate many mundane tasks such as map book generation, repairing broken data links in a collection of map documents, and to perform GIS data processing. Organize and manage your geodatabases and ArcGIS documents— ArcMap includes the Catalog window that enables you to organize all of your GIS datasets and geodatabases, your map documents and other ArcGIS files, your geoprocessing tools, and many other GIS information sets. You can also set up and manage geodatabase schemas in the Catalog window. Publish map documents as map services using ArcGIS for Server— ArcGIS content is brought to life on the web by publishing geographic information as a series of map services. ArcMap provides a simple user experience for publishing your map documents as map services. Share maps, layers, geoprocessing models, and geodatabases with other users—ArcMap includes tools that make it easy to package and share GIS datasets with other users. This includes the ability to share your GIS maps and data using ArcGIS Online. Document your geographic information—A key goal in GIS communities is to describe your geographic information sets to help you document your projects and for more effective search and data sharing. Using the Catalog window, you can document all of your GIS contents. For organizations who use standards-based metadata, you can also document your datasets using the ArcGIS metadata editor. Customize the user experience—ArcMap includes tools for customization, including the ability to write software add-ins to add new functionality, to simplify and streamline the user interface, and to use geoprocessing for task automation. 3.A quick tour of ArcMap Desktop » Mapping ArcMap represents geographic information as a collection of layers and other elements in a map view. There are two primary map views in ArcMap: the data view and the layout view. The data frame provides a geographic window, or map frame, in which you can display and work with geographic information as a series of map layers. The layout view provides a page view where map elements (such as the data frame, a scale bar, and a map title) are arranged on a page for map printing. ArcMap documents When you save a map you have created in ArcMap, it will be saved as a file on disk. This is an ArcMap document and is referred to as a map document or mxd since the file name extension (.mxd) is automatically appended to your map document name. You can work with an existing .mxd file by double-clicking the document to open it. This will start an ArcMap session for that .mxd file. Map documents contain display properties of the geographic information that you work with in the map—such as the properties and definitions of your map layers, data frames, and the map layout for printing—plus any optional customizations and macros that you add to your map. Views in ArcMap ArcMap displays map contents in one of two views: Data view Layout view Each view lets you look at and interact with the map in a specific way. In ArcMap data view, the map is the data frame. The active data frame is presented as a geographic window in which map layers are displayed and used. Within a data frame, you work with GIS information presented through map layers using geographic (real-world) coordinates. These will typically be ground measurements in units such as feet, meters, or measures of latitude-longitude (such as decimal degrees). The data view hides all the map elements on the layout, such as titles, north arrows, and scale bars, and lets you focus on the data in a single data frame, for instance, editing or analysis. Learn more about using data frames When you're preparing your map's layout, you'll want to work with your map in page layout view. A page layout is a collection of map elements (such as a data frame, map title, scale bar, north arrow, and a symbol legend) arranged on a page. Layouts are used for composing maps for printing or export to formats such as Adobe PDF. The Layout view is used to design and author a map for printing, exporting, or publishing. You can manage map elements within the page space (typically, in inches or centimeters), add new map elements, and preview what your map will look like before exporting or printing it. Common map elements include data frames with map layers, scale bars, north arrows, symbol legends, map titles, text, and other graphic elements. Learn more about page layouts Map layers Within the data frame, you display geographic datasets as layers, where each layer represents a particular dataset overlaid in the map. Map layers help convey information through: Discrete feature classes such as collections of points, lines, and polygons Continuous surfaces, such as elevation, which can be represented in a number of ways—for example, as a collection of contour lines and elevation points or as shaded relief Aerial photography or satellite imagery that covers the map extent Example map layers include streams and lakes, terrain, roads, political boundaries, parcels, building footprints, utility lines, and orthophoto imagery. In addition to representing geographic information, each layer's map symbols, colors, and labels help describe the objects in the map. You can interact with the layers displayed in each data frame to query each feature and see its attributes, perform analytical operations, and to edit and add new features to each dataset. A layer doesn't store the actual geographic data. Instead, it references a dataset, such as a feature class, an image, a grid, and so on. Referencing data in this way allows the layers on a map to automatically reflect the most up-to-date information in your GIS database. In ArcMap, you specify properties for each map layer, such as its map symbols and labeling rules, by right-clicking the layer in the table of contents and clickingProperties or by double-clicking on the layer name. Learn more about map layers The Table of Contents The table of contents lists all the layers on the map and shows what the features in each layer represent. The check box next to each layer indicates whether its display is currently turned on or off. The order of layers within the table of contents specifies their drawing order in the data frame. The map's table of contents helps you manage the display order of map layers and symbol assignment, as well as to set the display and other properties of each map layer. A typical map might have an image or a terrain base (such as shaded relief or elevation contours) near the bottom. Next comes basemap polygon features, followed by line and point features near the top, and then annotation and other reference information. Learn more about using the table of contents Page layouts A page layout is the arrangement of map elements and their overall design on a printed page or a digital map display. It is one of the primary display views that you work with in ArcMap—primarily to create maps for printing or for export and sharing using PDF. Example map elements include a title, legend, north arrow, scale bar, and a data frame. You can have more than one data frame in a map. This is often useful for map pages that contain multiple windows in your layouts (for example, to include a locator or index map that references the location of the primary data frame). Learn more about page layouts Saving and opening a map document When you save a map you have created in ArcMap, it will be saved as a file on disk. A file name extension (.mxd) will be automatically appended to your map document name. In later sessions, you can work with an existing .mxd file by double-clicking the document to open it. This will start an ArcMap session for that .mxd file. The Catalog Window ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene include a Catalog window that is used to organize and manage various types of geographic information as logical collections—for example, the data, maps, and results of your current GIS projects that you work with in ArcGIS. The Catalog window provides a tree view of file folders and geodatabases. File folders are used to organize your ArcGIS documents and files. Geodatabases are used to organize your GIS datasets. Learn more about the Catalog window The Home folder for a map One of the key workspaces in ArcMap is each map document's home folder, which is the folder location where your map document is stored. The Home folder is used by default in ArcMap to save results, store new datasets, and to access file-based information. Learn more about the Home folder The default geodatabase for a map Each map document has a default geodatabase, which is the home location for the spatial content of your map. This location is used for adding datasets and for saving resulting datasets created by various editing and geoprocessing operations. Learn more about the default geodatabase Using search in ArcMap ArcGIS includes the ability to search for GIS content and to put it work quickly— for example, by adding a search result to your map or by inserting a result item into a geoprocessing operation. 4.Essential ArcMap vocabulary Desktop » Mapping Map document (.mxd) A map used in ArcMap that is stored as a file on disk. Each map document contains the specifications for the map layers, the page layout, and all other map properties. Map documents make it easy to save, reuse, and share your work in ArcMap. Double-clicking a map document opens it as a new ArcMap session. Layer A map layer defines how a GIS dataset is symbolized and labeled (i.e., portrayed) in your map views. Each layer represents geographic data in ArcMap such as a particular theme of data. Example map layers include streams and lakes, terrain, roads, political boundaries, parcels, building footprints, utility lines, and orthophoto imagery. Table of contents The table of contents lists all the layers on the map and shows what the features in each layer represent. The check box next to each layer indicates whether its display is currently turned on or off. The order of layers within the table of contents specifies their drawing order in the data frame from bottom to top. The map's table of contents helps you manage the display order of map layers and symbol assignment, as well as to set the display and other properties of each map layer. Data frame The data frame displays a collection of layers drawn in a particular order for a given map extent and map projection. The table of contents on the left side of the map window shows the list of layers in the data frame. Page layouts A layout is a collection of map elements laid out and organized on a page. Common map elements include one or more data frames (each containing an ordered set of map layers), a scale bar, north arrow, map title, descriptive text, and a symbol legend. The Catalog Window ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene include a Catalog window that is used to organize and manage various types of geographic information as logical collections—for example, the data, maps, and results of your current GIS projects that you work with in ArcGIS. The Catalog window provides a tree view of file folders and geodatabases. File folders are used to organize your ArcGIS documents and files. Geodatabases are used to organize your GIS datasets. Labels Labels are text strings that are used to label features within map layers. Properties define the attribute column used as the source of the text string and how the label is portrayed in your map. Labels are dynamic—Label display is recomputed each time the map is redrawn (e.g., as you pan and zoom the map). Annotation Annotation is used to represent feature labels that are saved as graphic feature locations in the geodatabase. The text location is saved along with other text properties for each annotation feature. Annotation differs from labels because each annotation location and depiction is only computed once and saved. These are reused each time you redraw your map. Since the annotation position is preset, no label computation need be done each time the map is redrawn. Symbols Symbols are graphic elements that are used in map displays. There are a number of symbol types, such as: Markers which are primarily used to display point locations Line symbols used to display linear features and boundaries Fill symbols used to fill in polygons Text symbols used to set the font, size, color, and other text properties. Styles A style is a collection of symbols, colors, and map elements that match a theme or application domain—for example, a style set for transportation maps or geology maps. Basemap layers A basemap is used for locational reference and provides a framework on which users overlay or mashup their operational layers, perform tasks, and visualize geographic information. In ArcMap, a basemap layer can be used to hold map layers that are more static and thus can be used to support high performance, dynamic map display. II. WORKING WITH ArcMAP 1.Starting ArcMap Desktop » Mapping You can access ArcMap from the Start button on the Windows task bar. Alternatively, you can double-click an ArcMap document (.mxd file) to start ArcMap with the desired map. Selecting the map on startup When you start ArcMap from the Windows task bar, ArcMap will display a Getting Started dialog box from which you can pick an existing map or choose to create a new map. Double-click an existing map document to open it, or create a new one by clicking New Maps. The My Templates category displays the map documents (.mxd files) in the Templates folder in your application settings folder. This gives you a place to put map documents for use as templates that doesn't require access to the ArcGIS software installation folder. Only you will be able to see templates you put in this folder. This folder is located at %APPDATA%\ESRI\Desktop10.2\ArcMap\Templates. Learn more about using map templates When you are authoring a new map document, you can set its default geodatabase. Each map document has a default geodatabase, which is the home location for the spatial content of your map. This location is used for adding datasets and saving resulting datasets created through various editing and geoprocessing operations. Learn more about setting the default geodatabase If you open an existing map document, this field is read-only and shows you the default geodatabase of the map document you open. You can change its default geodatabase at any time via either the Catalog window (right-click the geodatabase you want to use as the default for your current document and choose Make Default Geodatabase) or the Map Document Properties dialog box (click File > Map Document Properties). From within ArcMap, you can also create a new map by doing one of the following: Click the New button on the main menu. Click File > New or press CTRL+N. Tip: You can turn on or off the splash screen and the Getting Started dialog box by clicking Customize > ArcMap Options and toggling the options on the General tab. 2.Opening a map document Desktop » Mapping There are a number of ways to open a map in ArcMap. You can: Double-click on a map document to open it. Select it in the ArcMap Getting Started dialog box. Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar. This topic describes each of these alternatives Double-click to open a map document 1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to the map document's location. 2. Double-click the document to open it. Select a map in the ArcMap Getting Started dialog box 1. When you start ArcMap from the Windows Start menu, you'll see the ArcMap Getting Started dialog box. 2. Select an existing map or browse to it to open it in ArcMap. Opening another map from an ArcMap session If you are already working in ArcMap, you can choose to open another map document. This will close your existing map and open the new one in its place. There are three ways to change your map to another one: Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar (or use the shortcut CTRL+O). Double-click on a map document in the Catalog window. Use the Search window to find a map and double-click to open it in ArcMap. Be sure to save your work in your existing map as it will be closed when the new map is opened. 3.Setting map document properties Desktop » Mapping The Map Document Properties dialog box contains fields and options that help you make your map document more usable. This dialog box also displays times when the document was last saved, last printed, or last exported. You can access this dialog box in two ways. From ArcMap, click File > Map Document Properties. From ArcCatalog or the Catalog window, right-click the map document in the tree view and click Properties. Note: All the settings in this dialog box only apply to your current document. Entering information about your map document This dialog box includes fields where you can enter information describing your map. This includes Title—In ArcMap, the contents of this field are used when you choose Insert > Title to add a title to your map layout, and if you update this field, it is automatically reflected in the title of your map the next time the map layout is redrawn. If this field is empty when you choose Insert > Title, you'll be prompted by ArcMap to enter a title, and this field is automatically populated with the title you enter. Summary—Contains brief information about your map document. When you share your map as a package or as a service, the text entered here will automatically be used by the Summary in the Item Description tab. Caution: You can change this text when setting the item descriptions for a map package or a map service. However, any changes you make will not be reflected in the map document properties. The changes you make will only be for the map package or for the map service. A summary is required when sharing a map as a package, publishing to ArcGIS Online or sharing a service withArcGIS Online. Description—Can contain more detailed information about your map document. When you share your map as a package or as a service, the text entered here will automatically be used by the Description in the Item Description tab. Caution: You can change this text when setting the item descriptions for a map package or a map service. However, any changes you make will not be reflected in the map document properties. The changes you make will only be for the map package or for the map service. Author—Acknowledgment indicating who authored the map document. Credits—Acknowledgment indicating who contributed to the map document. When you share your map as a package or as a service, the text entered here will automatically be used by the Credits in the Item Description tab. Caution: You can change this text when setting the item descriptions for a map package or a map service. However, any changes you make will not be reflected in the map document properties. The changes you make will only be for the map package or for the map service. Tags—Separate tags with a single comma (,). Tags make it easier to find this document when you or someone else searches for it. Caution: You can change this text when setting the item descriptions for a map package or a map service. However, any changes you make will not be reflected in the map document properties. The changes you make will only be for the map package or for the map service. Tags are required when sharing a map as a package, publishing to or sharing a service with ArcGIS Online. Setting a hyperlink base Paths or URLs for field-based hyperlinks accessed from this document will be preceded by this base. For example, if the hyperlink base is set to D:\Data, then the values in the field or fields used as hyperlinks to documents don't have to contain D:\Data. They can just contain the name of the file. Using this property makes it easier to manage hyperlinks, because if the location of the targets changes, you can simply edit this one setting instead of having to edit each value of the field providing the hyperlink targets. The Hyperlink Base setting has no effect on dynamic hyperlinks or on field-based hyperlinks to macros. You don't need to add a slash separator to the end of the hyperlink base you specify. By default, ArcGIS automatically adds a slash to the end of the hyperlink base—a forward slash (/) in the case of a hyperlink to a URL and a backward slash (\) in the case of a hyperlink to a document. Learn more about using hyperlinks Setting a default geodatabase Each map document has a default geodatabase, which is the home location for the spatial content of your map. This location is used for adding datasets and for saving resultant datasets created by various editing and geoprocessing operations. For example, when you export features from a layer, the data will be saved in the map's default geodatabase unless specified otherwise. The default geodatabase is synchronized with Current Workspace of Geoprocessing Environments; therefore, all output from tools or models will be saved to this default location. This property can't be changed if you accessed this dialog box by right-clicking a document in the Catalog window (unless the document you right-clicked is the current document you have open in the application) or in ArcCatalog. Legacy: If no default geodatabase is shown when you access this dialog box in the Catalog window or ArcCatalog, you are looking at the properties of an 8.x or 9.x document. Once that document has been saved using ArcGIS 10.0 or later, the default geodatabase that it uses will be shown here. Learn more about setting the Default Geodatabase Changing how the document references data You can define how path references are maintained in your document by checking or unchecking Store relative pathnames to data source. If this box is checked, paths are stored as incomplete paths that are relative to the current location of this document on disk. Using relative paths makes the map document more easily portable because ArcGIS will resolve the paths to the document's data sources relative to the document's current location in the file system rather than by full paths that include a drive letter or machine name. Using relative paths doesn't mean that the layers in your document will never need repairing. Even with relative paths, it is still possible for a document to be unable to find its data sources if the document or the data sources are moved to a different location relative to each other, such as to a different part of the folder hierarchy or to a different disk. This setting only applies to how the document references file-based data (such as file geodatabases, shapefiles, coverages, and raster files) and data in personal geodatabases. It has no effect on how the document references data on servers. Layers representing data and services on these servers reference them directly by server name rather than via paths. This property can't be changed if you accessed this dialog box by right-clicking a document in the Catalog window (unless the document you right-clicked is the current document you have open in the application) or in ArcCatalog. Learn more about referencing data in the map Tip:If you want all your new maps to be stored with relative paths, you will need to specify relative paths as the default. Click Customize > ArcMap Options to open the ArcMap Options dialog box, then click the General tab. Check the option to Make relative paths the default for new map documents. This setting is stored in the registry. Making a thumbnail of your map A thumbnail is a graphic illustrating the data an item contains. Thumbnails can be particularly helpful when you are evaluating the items you've found with a search, especially when you are searching a geoportal or metadata catalog where you might not have access to the actual item and can't preview its data. The thumbnail is captured at the time you press the button, so changes you make to the contents of the document after you have pressed this button are not reflected. In ArcMap the thumbnail snapshot is a picture of your map's full layout page. Thumbnails are not dynamic, so once you create a thumbnail it won't reflect any changes you make in your map until you delete it and re-create it. To re-create the thumbnail for the document, click Delete Thumbnail and click Make Thumbnail. This property can't be changed if you accessed this dialog box by right-clicking a document in the Catalog window (unless the document you right-clicked is the current document you have open in the application) or in ArcCatalog. Learn more about creating a thumbnail for maps 4.Adding layers to a map Desktop » Mapping Each layer references a dataset that is stored in a geodatabase, coverage, shapefile, raster, and so on. It's easy to add layers to a map—you simply select a dataset and drag it from the Catalog or Search window onto your map or add a dataset using the Add Data button. Once each layer is added to your map, you'll typically set the symbology and labeling properties and organize the drawing order of the layers in your table of contents to make your map work well. If your data is stored in a format supported by ArcMap, you can add it directly to your map as a layer. If your data isn't stored in a supported format, you can use the data conversion utilities in ArcToolbox or the Data Interoperability extension to convert practically any data and display it in your map. Adding map layers There are a number of ways to add map layers. Each of them is covered here. Adding a dataset To create a new map layer, simply add a dataset to your map, globe, or 3D scene. There are a few ways to add datasets: Using the Add Data button—Click the Add Data button and navigate to the desired dataset. Then select and add it to your map. Tip: When you use the Add Data button in ArcMap for the first time in a new session, it automatically returns to the last location you added data from. By unchecking Return to last used location when Add Data dialog first used on the General tab of the ArcMap Options dialog box, the Add Data dialog box will instead default to the top level of the Catalog tree. This improves the performance of the Add Data command because you don't have to wait while it reconnects to the network drive, database location, or GIS server that you accessed in your previous session. To open the ArcMap Options dialog box, click Customize > ArcMap Options. Copying or dragging a layer—You can move layers between data frames or maps by copying and pasting or dragging the layer from one data frame to another. Dragging a dataset from the Catalog window—You can navigate to datasets and add them directly in ArcMap. Using the Catalog window, navigate to the desired dataset. Drag the dataset into the map's data frame. Dragging a dataset from the Search window—You can add data to your map from the Search window. Click Data, enter the search terms to find the desired dataset, then drag the dataset into the map's data frame. See Using search in ArcGIS for more information. Dragging a dataset from ArcCatalog—You can add data to your map from the ArcCatalog application. In ArcCatalog, navigate to the desired dataset. Then drag it onto the ArcMap data frame. Adding multiple datasets—You can select and add multiple datasets at one time by highlighting all of the desired datasets instead of a single one when adding. Tip: When you uncheck the Make newly added layers visible by default option on the General tab of the ArcMap Optionsdialog box, new layers that you add will appear in the table of contents but not be automatically turned on (drawn on the map). For example, if you are working with large datasets that may take a long time to draw, it might be good to uncheck this box so you can set properties before turning on the layer in the table of contents. Open the dialog box by clicking Customize > ArcMap Options. Adding data from ArcGIS Online You can add data and layers that are published and shared online by the ArcGIS community. See Adding data from ArcGIS online for more information. Setting layer symbology When you create a new layer by adding a dataset, the layer will be drawn using a default set of drawing properties. So one of your first steps will be to set the layer's symbology and other display properties. See About displaying layers for more information. Setting the layer drawing order When adding a new layer, it will automatically be placed above others of the same type. For example, a new line feature will be placed above other line features. Thus, you'll want to position layers appropriately. For example, you may want to place layers that form the background of your map, such as an ocean layer, at or near the bottom of the table of contents. The default layer drawing order—If you simultaneously add a number of datasets to your map, the new layers in your map will be ordered as follows (raster on the bottom): 1. Annotation 2. Features Point Line Polygon TIN/Terrain Raster For more information, see Listing by drawing order. Common layer operations Once a layer is part of a map, you can do all of the following: Toggle the layer display on and off. Move layers from one data frame to another. Set scale-dependent drawing for your layer. Choose which features or subset of features to display. Set layer properties and symbolize the layer. Label the layer. Save layers and layer packages for sharing. Display and work with tabular information about a layer. Organize a logical collection of layers into a group layer for various purposes. Add the layer to a basemap layer for increased display performance. When layers aren't being drawn on the map When layers are turned on but are not being drawn on the map, the table of contents may provide some clues. In the table of contents below, all the layers are checked on for display, but the parks and lakes layers do not appear in the map display. In the example below, the parks layer is not drawing because the link to its data source is broken, indicated by the red exclamation point (!) beside the check box. The lakes layer is not drawing because the current display map scale of the data frame is outside the layer's visible scale range, indicated by the dimmed scale bar under the check box. See repairing broken data links and displaying layers at certain scales for more information. Removing layers from a map When you no longer need a layer on your map, you can remove it. Select the layer, right-click, and choose Remove. Removing a layer doesn't affect the underlying data source on which the layer is based. You can delete (and manage) data sources, such as a feature class, using theCatalog window. Adding layers to a map from Windows, e-mails, or Web pages Layer files and layer packages are registered to the ArcGIS for Desktop applications, allowing you to double-click them in Windows Explorer, Microsoft Outlook, the Windows Desktop, and so on, and add them directly to your current ArcMap or ArcGlobe session. Layer files will appear with the familiar yellow icon. Clicking layer files embedded in Web pages will also add them into your session. If you don't have an ArcGIS for Desktop application running, opening a layer file will automatically start the appropriate application: ArcMap will start and add the layer into the empty map, or in the case of layer files containing 3D-only content, ArcGlobe will start and ad 5.Using data frames Desktop » Mapping The data frame displays a collection of layers drawn in a particular order for a given map extent and map projection. The table of contents on the left side of the map window shows the list of layers in the data frame. Each layer in the data frame is used to display information from a dataset (such as a feature class or an image file). The table of contents lists the drawing order of each layer. You work with features, rasters, and layers within the data frame in ground units (using feet, meters, and so on). When you create a map, it contains a default data frame listed in the table of contents as Layers (you can rename it if you want). In data view, the display window is the data frame—showing the map layers of the active data frame drawn according to their order in the table of contents from bottom to top. Tip: You can toggle the display of scroll bars in data view and layout view by clicking View > Scroll Bars. This setting is independent in each view, so to hide scroll bars in both views, you'll need to change the setting in both places. Working with additional data frames While in many maps, you'll only need one data frame, you can add more data frames by clicking Insert > Data Frame on the main menu. You can remove a data frame by right-clicking the data frame name in the table of contents and selecting Remove. Note: A map must have at least one data frame. You can't delete the last data frame on a map. When a new data frame is added in ArcMap, it appears in the table of contents and is highlighted as the active data frame. The active data frame When your map document contains more than one data frame, you will have one that is the active data frame; that is, the one you are actively working with. The active data frame name is shown in bold in the table of contents. To make a data frame active, right-click on its name in the table of contents and select Activate. Moving layers between data frames When you have more than one data frame and add layers to the map, they're added to the active data frame. You can move layers from one data frame to another by selecting them and then dragging them into the target data frame. Navigating in the data frame and working with its layers The Tools toolbar is one of the primary ways that you interact with geographic information displayed in the data frame. It contains tools for working with the contents within the active data frame, for example, to pan and zoom your map, to identify features, and to measure distances. Functions on the Tools toolbar Butt on Name Function Zoom In Allows you to zoom in to a geographic window by clicking a point or dragging a box. Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out from a geographic window by clicking a point or dragging a box. Pan Allows you to pan the data frame. Full Extent Allows you to zoom to the full extent of your map. Fixed Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the center of your data frame. Fixed Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out on the center of your data frame. Back Allows you to go back to the previous extent. Forward Allows you to go forward to the next extent. Select Features Allows you to select features graphically, by clicking or dragging a box around them. You can also use the Select By Polygon, Lasso, Circle, and Line tools to select features using graphics drawn to the screen. Clear Selection Unselects all the currently selected features in the active data frame. Select Elements Allows you to select, resize, and move text, graphics, and other objects placed on the map. Identify Identifies the geographic feature or place on which you click. Hyperlink Triggers hyperlinks from features. HTML Pop-up Triggers HTML pop-up windows from features. Measure Measures distances and areas on your map. Find Finds features in the map. Find Route Allows you to calculate point-to-point routes and driving directions. Go To XY Location Allows you to type an x,y location and navigate to it. Open Time Slider Window Opens a time slider window for working with time-aware layers and tables. Create Viewer Window Allows you to create a new viewer window by dragging a rectangle. In addition, right-clicking in the data frame displays a context menu of data navigation tools. Right-clicking inside the data frame view displays this context menu. Interactive panning and zooming using basemap layers Smooth, continuous panning and zooming can be turned on and are productive, especially when using basemap layers. Improving display performance You can use a number of approaches to ensure better drawing performance of your data frames. Here are a few of the approaches you can take: Analyze your map for drawing performance. Use basemap layers to compute layer display once and reuse it during your ArcMap session. Use hardware acceleration for basemap layers and accelerated raster layers to further improve interactive display performance. Data frame properties Each data frame is a geographic window for displaying GIS information. Data frames have properties that define the context for displaying and working with the data they contain. To view and set properties of a data frame, follow these steps: 1. Right-click the data frame's name in the table of contents (or the data frame on the layout). 2. Click Properties and click the various tabs to view and set data frame properties. You can set and review various properties under each tab on this dialog box. The coordinate system is one of the most important properties because it defines the map projection for the data frame. Typically, the coordinate system of your data frame is determined by the coordinate system of the first dataset you add to your map. All other added datasets will be projected on the fly to match the coordinate system. You can review and set the data frame's coordinate system from the Coordinate System tab on the Data Frame Properties dialog box. In addition, other properties can be set from this dialog box. These include adding grids and graticules; setting the full extent of your map window when you click theFull Extent button; creating and managing a feature cache to boost performance across a network; and setting appearance properties such as the position of the data frame on the page, borders, and background. See Working with data frames in page layouts for how to use many of the tabs on the Data Frame Properties dialog box. Setting the map scale of your data frame's map display You can set a specific map scale at which to view data in your map frame using the Map Scale drop-down list on the main menu. Type in the desired map scale or choose one from the drop-down list. See Working with map scales to learn more about working with map scales in ArcMap. Map navigation using bookmarks Bookmarks provide a way to locate specific areas on your map that users can navigate to easily. When you are using ArcMap and find an extent that you want to mark, you can add a bookmark to your map that will make it easy for others to find it later on. See Using spatial bookmarks for more information. Working with the data frame tools The Data Frame Tools toolbar is available for working with data frames. You can open this toolbar by clicking Customize > Toolbars > Data Frame Tools on the main menu. Using these tools, you can rotate your map contents in the data frame and use a collection of your own places (My Places) for map navigation. See Using My Placesfor more information on using place-names to navigate around your maps. Common data frame tasks Here are some common operations and links to more information on performing each: Common tasks Where to go for information Setting or changing the coordinate system About coordinate systems and map projections for map display Setting the data frame's coordinate system Controlling the map extent Customizing your map extent Zooming and navigating a map Moving around the map Working with map scales in ArcMap Using keyboard shortcuts to navigate maps and page layouts Creating an inset or reference map Creating an overview map using extent indicators Customizing the appearance of a data frame on the layout page Clipping data frames to a custom shape Changing the extent used by the Full Extent button Setting a custom extent for the map's full extent Improving the performance of map display Improving map performance 6. Coordinate systems for map display Desktop » Mapping In ArcMap, the map window is called the Data Frame, which is where GIS datasets are symbolized and labeled within a layer-based map display. Each data frame has a particular extent representing part of the world. Hence, each data frame has a coordinate system for the map display. By default the data frame's coordinate system is set to the first layer added to your map. So most of the time, the map's coordinate system is the same as the coordinate system of your geographic data. However, many maps must use a specialized map projection in order to meet a particular requirement. Choosing an appropriate coordinate system for your map is often an important step to create a map display that will meet your needs. Considerations for choosing the coordinate system Various coordinate systems are designed to maintain certain properties, and you can often choose the coordinate system of your map and its purpose because of these properties. Here is a short overview of some key considerations. Map purpose Maps constructed for a special purpose should use a map projection that preserves important projection characteristics. For example, navigation maps often use the Mercator projection because this projection has the special property of representing a path of constant bearing as a straight line (called a rhumb line). Thematic maps that symbolize an attribute of an area, such as population density, often use a equal-area projection. And so on. Map extent The area covered by your map will affect your selection of map projection. Several dozen map projections have been designed specifically for maps of the world, such as the Winkel-Tripel and Robinson projections. Maps of continents often use conic projections such as the Albers equal area projection. Map orientation Whether you are mapping an area with an extent longer in the east–west or north–south orientation will influence your selection of map projection. Generally, conic projections are used for areas with a greater east–west extent. Transverse cylindrical projections are commonly used for areas with a greater north–south extent. Latitude range The latitude range of your map influences the selection of a map projection. Cylindrical projections work well for mapping equatorial regions. For mid-latitudes, the map projections most often used are based on cylindrical and conic projections. Polar regions are usually mapped with planar projections. National coordinate systems Frequently, you create general purpose maps that cover local areas such as cities, counties, states, or provinces. Especially if these maps are to be used by government agencies, using the map projection specified by a national or regional coordinate system is a good choice. Two examples are the State Plane Coordinate System in the United States and the Great Britain National Grid for the United Kingdom. For regions not covered by a national coordinate system, the Universal Transverse Mercator system (UTM) or Gauss-Krüger (GK) is commonly used for large-scale maps. UTM zones are six degrees of longitude wide, about 660 kilometers at the equator or 330 kilometers at 60° north or south latitude. Maps for use on the Web Often, web maps define the coordinate system that will be used for making mashups. You'll need to match the coordinate system of the base map you choose to use, whether it is ArcGIS Online, Microsoft Bing Maps, or Google Maps. All of these online maps are stored with a continuous tiling system to support the seamless display of map data for large scale subareas (e.g., imagery and streets within a city). This requires a single map projection for the world. The spherical Mercator projection is used. This is often referred to as the Web Mercator projection. Geographic databases are in latitude–longitude (geographic coordinates) Many datasets and whole databases are often collected and maintained in latitude–longitude. This is especially true of organizations who build and assemble data collections that span the globe. Latitude–longitude is a spherical (geographic) coordinate system and should always be projected in your map display. Maps created with data from these systems will cover any number of objectives. Use the same considerations described above for choosing a coordinate system. 7. Specifying a coordinate system To display your data correctly, each data frame uses a coordinate system. It determines the map projection for the map display in the data frame. The data frame's coordinate system need not be the same as the data you are using, although if ArcMap has to project your data on the fly, it can take longer to draw. When ArcMap is started with a new, empty map, the coordinate system for the default data frame is not defined. The first layer added to an empty data frame sets the coordinate system for the data frame, but you can change it if necessary. As you add subsequent layers, they are automatically displayed using the data frame's coordinate system as long as the data source's coordinate system is defined. If there isn't enough information, ArcMap will be unable to project the data in each layer and display it correctly. In this case, you'll have to supply the necessary coordinate system information yourself. Generally, if you have a layer whose dataset does not have a coordinate system defined and you know which coordinate system it is using, you should use the Define Projection tool in ArcToolbox to assign projection information to your data. This is required for working with that data in ArcGIS. Tip: To see if your data source has a coordinate system defined, right-click the layer in the ArcMap table of contents, and click Properties to open the Layer Properties dialog box. Click the Source tab, then look in the Data Source box. You can also use the Catalog window to see if your data has a coordinate system defined. You can review and set the data frame's coordinate system from the Coordinate System tab on the Data Frame Properties dialog box. Changing the data frame's coordinate system Note: To set the coordinate system of a data frame, you must not currently be editing. To end your editing session, click Stop Editing from the Editor menu. 1. Right-click the data frame name and choose Properties to bring up the Data Frame Properties dialog box. 2. Click the Coordinate System tab and navigate to the desired coordinate system for your map display. You can filter the coordinate systems presented in the dialog box by performing a Spatial Filter, a String Filter, or a combination of the two. The Spatial Filter filters the list of coordinate systems based on the extent provided, whether it be the Current Visible Extent, an Outline of Features, an Outline of Selected Graphics, or a Custom Extent. The String Filter filters the list of coordinate systems based on folder names, coordinate system names, or well-known ids (WKID). When using the filter options to reduce the number of available coordinate systems, only the folders containing the matching coordinate systems will appear. Tip: Once you have located the coordinate system you can add it to your Favorites folder by clicking the Add To Favorites button or right-clicking on it and selecting Add To Favorites. The physical location of this folder is theApplication Data\ESRI\Desktop10.2\ArcMap\Coordinate Systems folder in your Windows profiles directory. To set the data frame coordinate system to be the same as a particular layer in the data frame, open the Layers folder and select the coordinate system. Once the coordinate system is expanded, you will see the layers that reference it. To set the data frame coordinate system to be the same as a layer that is not in the data frame, click the Add Coordinate System drop-down menu, selectImport, and browse to a data source that is defined with the coordinate system you want to use. Using Import you can also import previously saved .prj files. Note: You can create a new coordinate system by clicking the Add Coordinate System drop-down menu, and selecting New. You can also modify parameters of an existing coordinate system by right-clicking it and selectingModify Item. Coordinate systems created with either of these methods will be displayed in the Custom folder. Changing the coordinate system of a data frame doesn't alter the coordinate systems of the source data in the data frame. Geographic transformations To specify a geographic transformation for the data, click the Transformations button and select the desired transformation, or create a custom or compound transformation. Converting correctly between two geographic coordinate systems requires a geographic or datum transformation. ArcMap doesn't automatically choose a transformation for you because there are often multiple transformation choices that could be applied between two geographic coordinate systems. The transformations presented in the drop-down menu are sorted by suitability for the layer's extent. Transformations can differ by method and parameters which affect their accuracy by area of use. It is up to you to decide which transformation is most appropriate for your data and your purposes. (There is one exception to this where ArcMap will automatically apply a transformation: If the two geographic coordinate systems are NAD 1927 and NAD 1983, and the data is determined by the application to be in the lower 48 US states, the NADCON transformation is used automatically.) Working with map and display units The map units are the units in which the layers in the data frame are displayed and used. The map units are determined by the data frame's coordinate system. Once a coordinate system has been specified for the data frame, the map units cannot be changed unless you choose a different coordinate system for the data frame or modify the existing coordinate system's linear units. If the data frame is using a projected coordinate system, the map units will be the linear unit of the chosen projected coordinate system, such as feet or meters. If the data frame is using a geographic coordinate system (in other words, the data frame is not projected), the map units will be the angular (spherical) unit of the geographical coordinate system, usually Decimal Degrees. The map units will be shown as unknown until the coordinate system is specified for the data frame. If the data frame contains no data, add your first layer to the data frame, which will set the coordinate system automatically. The data frame's display units default to being the same as the map units but can be changed at any time. The display units are used by the Measure tool, provide the default units used by scale bars, and are the units in which the map coordinate readout and the area and dimensions of graphics you draw are shown in the status bar. Note: The feet, miles, and yards listed here are US survey units, so they are US Survey Feet, US Survey Miles, and US Survey Yards. The imperial or international versions of these units are not supported as display units, although both versions of these units are supported in ArcGIS projected coordinate system definitions. You can change the Map and Display units on the Data Frame Properties dialog box. 1. Right-click the data frame name in the table of contents and click Properties. 2. Click the General tab. You can see the current Map units and also set the Display units. You can also set additional coordinate display properties for the status bar by clicking Customize > ArcMap Options on the main menu and clicking on the Data Viewtab. Tip: You can also specify that the XY coordinate readout will be in different units than the display units. For example, if you want the length of graphic lines that you draw on your map to be shown in the status bar in miles, but you want the XY coordinate readout to be in decimal degrees, set the display units to be miles here, then go to the Data View tab on theArcMap Options dialog box, and choose the option to use decimal degrees instead of display units for the coordinate display. Note that settings you make in the ArcMap Options dialog box apply to all the data frames in your map document. 8.The geographic coordinate systems warning The geographic coordinate systems warning appears whenever data you are adding uses a different geographic coordinate system than the one used in the map or globe you are adding it into. Why is this information important? ArcMap and ArcGlobe can convert data between coordinate systems. This is often called projecting the data. If the source and target coordinate system do not use the same geographic coordinate system, data can be shifted anywhere from a few meters to hundreds of meters from the correct locations. The table lists any data sources that you are adding and their geographic coordinate systems. The coordinate system of the data or the map/globe may be a projected coordinate system like Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). Each projected coordinate system is based on a geographic one. The dialog box retrieves the geographic coordinate system information from the data sources and the map or globe. Converting correctly between two geographic coordinate systems requires a geographic, or datum, transformation. ArcMap doesn't automatically choose a transformation for you, because there are often multiple transformations that could be applied between two geographic coordinate systems. Transformations can differ by method and parameters that affect their accuracy, or by area of use. It is up to you to decide which transformation is most appropriate for your data and your purposes. Note: There is one exception to this rule where ArcMap will automatically apply a transformation: If the two geographic coordinate systems are NAD 1927 and NAD 1983 and the data is determined by the application to be in the lower 48 U.S. states, the NADCON transformation is used automatically. The Transformations button will open the Geographic Coordinate Systems Transformations dialog box, where you can see what already defined transformations are available or define a custom or compound transformation. The transformations in the drop-down list are ordered with the best option first. Or, if you prefer, you can access the Geographic Coordinate Systems Transformations dialog box via the data frame's Coordinate Systems tab. This Geographic Coordinate Systems Warning dialog box will not appear if you add data later that does not have the map or globe's coordinate system if you have set a geographic transformation. If the transformation is between the same coordinate systems, it will treat the set one as the default. Note: If you check the Don't warn me again ever check box, the dialog box will be turned off while this ArcGIS version is installed. If you later want to display it, start the AdvancedArcMapSettings.exe utility and uncheck the Skip Datum check box on the Miscellaneous tab. 9. Using the table of contents The table of contents lists all the layers on the map and shows what the features in each layer represent. The map's table of contents helps you manage the display order of map layers and symbol assignment, as well as set the display and other properties of each map layer. The layers at the top of the table of contents draw on top of those below them. Thus, you'll put the layers that form the background of your map, such as the ocean or an image, near the bottom of the table of contents and the layers to which you want to draw the map reader's attention near the top. A typical map might have an image or a terrain base (such as shaded relief or elevation contours) near the bottom. Next, comes basemap polygon features, followed by line and point features near the top. And finally, you might typically see some reference layers, such as road names and place-names, that provide locational context. You use the check box or icon to the left of each map layer to turn it on or off. Holding down the CTRL key and clicking turns all map layers on and off simultaneously. You can set the display properties for each map layer so that it draws within a specific range of map scales. When the map display is out of range for scale- dependent drawing, the layers will not be visible. Layers that are out of range of the current map scale are indicated in the table of contents by a gray check box with a scale bar under it. Ways to list layers in the table of contents The table of contents has several ways of listing layers: by drawing order, source, and whether layers are visible or selectable. Click the icon at the top of the tab to switch between these grouping methods. You can tell which mode is active by looking at the button (the active one is highlighted) and the organization of the items in the table of contents. The different ways of listing layers are simply methods of displaying information about the same layers. The options include the following: Listing by drawing order Use List By Drawing Order to author the contents of your map, such as to change the display order of layers on the map, rename or remove layers, and create or manage group layers. All the data frames in your map are listed when the table of contents is sorted by drawing order. However, only the active data frame— indicated by a bold data frame name—is shown in the map in data view. The order of layers determines how layers are drawn on a map. Within a data frame, the layers listed at the top will draw over those in the list below them, and so on, down the list. You can easily drag and drop layers to adjust their drawing order or organize them in separate data frames. To turn on or off a layer, click the check box next to the layer's name. Right-clicking opens a menu containing many commands for working with layers, including accessing their properties, zooming to them, selecting from them, and opening their attribute tables. Listing by source Click List By Source to show the layers in each data frame with the layers organized by the folders or databases in which the data sources referenced by the layers can be found. This view will also list tables that have been added to the map document as data. This view is very useful for managing and repairing each layer's path reference to its data source in your map document. Listing by visibility Click List By Visibility to see a dynamic listing of the layers currently displayed in the active data frame. The way layers are listed updates automatically as you pan and zoom, interact with the map, select features, and turn layers on and off. Listing layers by visibility helps you visually simplify and organize a detailed or complicated map with many layers. Since the organization of the table of contents visibility list is controlled automatically, you cannot change the order or groupings of layers manually. Layers within a group layer are listed individually, since each layer can have its own visibility and selection properties. You can choose to display the group layer's name beside the layer's entry on the Table Of Contents Optionsdialog box. With List By Visibility, you have visual cues to indicate the layer's visibility. Each type of layer has its own icon, and the symbol is either colored to indicate the layer is on or gray when it is not, so you can quickly look at the icon to determine whether a layer is visible. When layers are listed by visibility, they are grouped into these categories: Visible—The layer is turned on. Out of Scale Range—The layer has a visible scale range and is not being displayed at the current map scale. To bring it back into view, right-click and clickZoom To Make Visible. Not Visible—The layer is turned off. To turn it back on, click the icon to the left of the layer name. When you right-click a layer name, the menu that appears contains the same commands as the menu for listing layers by drawing order and selection. To turn a layer on or off, click the layer icon to the left of the layer name, such as for a line layer or for a polygon layer. To make a layer selectable or not selectable, click the selection icon to the right of the layer name. If that icon is colored , the layer is selectable; if it is gray , the layer is not selectable. Listing by selection Click List By Selection to group layers automatically by whether or not they are selectable and have selected features. A selectable layer means that features in the layer can be selected using the interactive selection tools, such as those on the Tools toolbar or the Edit tool, when in an edit session. When layers are listed by selection, they are grouped into these categories: Selected—The layer has features selected. Selectable (no features selected)—The layer is selectable, but it has no features currently selected. Not Selectable—The layer is not selectable, and you cannot use the interactive selection tools to select features in it. Similar to listing layers by visibility, you can turn a layer on or off using the layer icons to the left of the layer name, such as for a line layer or for a polygon layer, and make a layer selectable or not selectable using the icon to the right of the layer name. In addition, the number of selected features is listed next to the selection icon. When there are selected features, you can clear the selection by clicking the white selection icon in the column between the selectable icon and number of selected features. When you right-click a layer name, the menu that appears contains commands that work with selections. You can navigate to selected features, clear the selection, create a selection layer, open the table showing the selection, and so on. When only a few features are currently selected, the selected features are listed individually under the layer name. The square icon next to the feature ID allows you to refine which features are selected; clicking the box deselects that particular feature. With a large number of selected features, the layer's entry does not include this icon. You can turn off this setting altogether on the Table of Contents Options dialog box. The ID of the feature is obtained from the layer's display expression, which is set on the Display tab of the Layer Properties dialog box. Knowing whether layers are selectable or have selected features is particularly useful when editing, running geoprocessing tools (any tool that accepts layers considers the selected features), or performing other tasks that operate on selected features. For example, when copying features, both the editing environment and the Copy Features geoprocessing tool will copy only the selected features. You can list the table of contents by selection and easily see which layers have a selection. Layers containing at least one selected feature are automatically promoted to the top of the window, so you can avoid scrolling or sifting through a long layer list looking for layers with selected features. In addition, even though a layer is designated as not selectable and you cannot use the interactive selection tools to select its features, it is still possible to select from that layer using other methods of selection—such as with the table window, Select By Location, or Select By Attributes. Display options for the table of contents You can use the Options button on the table of contents to set display properties. This will display the Table of Contents Options dialog box. The Preferences tab On the Preferences tab, you can do the following: Check Show selected features in selection list to list selected features individually when the table of contents items are grouped by selection. This allows you to refine the selection, since you can click a feature in the table of contents to deselect it. When unchecked, only layer names will appear in the table of contents. Click Sort layers by and click whether to sort them by the order layers are drawn or alphabetically by layer name. Check Show group layer name to include the name of a group layer next to the layer's name when the table of contents is listed by visibility or selection. Since each layer in a group layer can have its own visibility and selection statuses, layers are not listed with their parent group. When unchecked, the group layer's name will not appear next to any child layers. List the table of contents by drawing order to create and manage group layers. The Patches tab On the Patches tab, you can change the patch size or shape as desired. Patches are the geometric shape that is used to represent a specific kind of feature in the table of contents. (The patches in a map legend are set separately when you create a legend.) Click the Line or Area symbol and click the desired symbol from the list. 10. Using symbols and styles A key aspect of creating a beautiful map is the choice of symbols, colors, and map elements that you will use. Not everyone in the GIS community has the design skills necessary to choose elegant symbols and color schemes on their own or apply them effectively. This is one of the big challenges faced by many ArcGIS users. Fortunately, there are highly skilled cartographers in the ArcGIS community who compile libraries of symbols, colors, and other related map elements. They share these as ArcGIS styles. In ArcGIS, a style is a library of symbol collections, color schemes, rendering rules, and related map elements that help users build better maps. Each style adds these graphic libraries to ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene which you can tap into as a rich source for mapping and visualization. One of the fundamental capabilities of ArcMap is the ability to share these styles, which can be referenced in ArcMap. This enables all users to create consistent, attractive maps that make an impact. This topic introduces some of the key symbol terms and provides guidance on where to learn more. Symbols Symbols are used to portray points, lines, polygons, and text in maps. This is similar to the mechanisms used in Microsoft Word documents and PowerPoint presentations. Here's a brief overview of symbol types used in maps and other GIS views (e.g., in 3D): Marker symbols—These are point symbols used to portray points on maps and are often used in line patterns. For example: Well symbols Tree symbols A weather front line symbol built using a series of markers arrayed along the line in patterns. Line symbols—These are used to draw line features and polygon boundaries as well as to render other map lines. For example: Fill symbols—These are used for filling polygons and other solid map elements. For example: Text symbols—Text symbols include font, size, color, and other properties. They are used for feature labels, annotation, and other map text. For example: Styles ArcGIS supports the ability to produce a consistent set of cartography that adheres to an agreed upon standard by a workgroup, organization, or community. One of the ways that this is promoted is through the use of styles. A style is a collection of symbols, colors, map elements, and other graphical elements that enable a group of users to create and share consistent cartography. A style is a library of all of these elements that can be shared among a group of ArcGIS users. There are many types of graphics elements that can be shared as part of a style. This example shows some of the colors that are part of the ESRI.style file. Notice all of the other categories of graphic elements. Styles hold symbols, graphics, and colors that are used in ArcGIS. Each time you search for and pick a symbol for your map layout and map layers in ArcGIS, you are selecting the symbol from a style library. In ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene, you can add styles and reference them in your map documents. This provides a consistent library of symbols to use in your maps, globes, and scenes. Using styles is one of the ways that organizations and communities share a standard. By sharing a style, all users reference the same symbols, labeling rules, borders, scale bars, and so on. This leads to a shared mapping standard and more consistent representations among a user group. Esri provides a series of styles for various user communities. Plus, users can build and share their own styles. In ArcMap, all of the users in a group can add shared styles to the collection of symbols and other elements that provide a library of graphics to add to their maps. 11. Referencing data in the map Data references used in map documents, globes, and 3D scenes are stored as map layer properties. Most layers reference data stored in geodatabases or as files on disk—for example, shapefiles, coverages, CAD files, imagery, and so on. Each data reference is a path, and there are a number of alternatives to store that path. Each time you add data to a map, the path to the data is stored in a layer in the map. When you open your map, ArcMap locates the data it needs using these stored paths. You can view the path of the data represented by a layer in your map by looking at the List by Source view of the Table of Contents or by double-clicking the layer to open theLayer Properties dialog box, then clicking on the Source tab. If ArcMap can't find the data for a particular layer, the layer will appear in the ArcMap table of contents, but it won't be drawn. Instead, a red exclamation point will appear next to the layer to indicate that the layer needs to be repaired. Learn more about repairing broken data links Options for paths There are several options for referencing datasets using paths. These include: Full paths An example of a full path is: C:\GIS\Project1\Boundary.shp To share maps saved with full paths to their data sources, your users must have access to the same computer (or replicate your folder structure on their computer). Note: Full paths are also known as absolute paths or complete paths. Relative paths Relative paths specify the location of the data relative to the current location on disk of the referenced file. An example of a relative path is: \Project1\Boundary.shp You can reference data in a folder that's above the folder containing the map. In these cases, the relative path will contain \..\ for each level up in the folder structure to be traversed. Since relative paths don't contain drive names, they enable a layer and its associated data to be moved to any disk drive without having to repair the layer's data links in your map documents. UNC paths Universal Naming Convention (UNC) paths use a syntax for paths and files on a network of computers. The syntax is: \\<computer name>\<shared folder>\ followed by any number of directories and terminated with the referenced directory or file name. For example: \\pondermatic\public\studyarea.gdb \\billywood\public\streets.lyr \\omnipotent\shared_stuff\wednesday\tools Note: There may be a performance disadvantage when using UNC paths because network file access is typically slower than direct disk access on your local computer (using absolute paths), which can affect map drawing performance for map services. Specifying the format of paths You can view (as well as specify) how path references will be persisted in your documents using the Map Document Properties dialog box as follows: 1. Click File > Map Document Properties on the main menu. 2. Check Store relative pathnames to data sources to specify relative paths. 3. Tip: 4. If you want all your new maps to be stored with relative paths you will need to specify relative paths as the default. Click Customize > ArcMap Options to open the ArcMap Options dialog box, then click the General tab. Check the option to Make relative paths the default for new map documents. This setting is stored in the registry. Once you've saved the layer file, you can't change the data source options from absolute to relative or vice versa. The layer will always maintain the data source option that was set for the map document at the time you saved the layer. 12. Pausing the map's drawing If you want to make changes to your map without having the map refresh each time, you can use the Pause Drawing button. When you pause drawing, you temporarily suspend all drawing in ArcMap in both data view and layout view. The Pause Drawing tool is most useful when you are changing the symbology and properties of several layers or adding or removing many layers and don't want the map to redraw each time you click OK on a dialog box. While drawing is paused, your data frame will look like this: Note: Each time your map refreshes, the placement of your labels is recalculated. Depending on the label engine used and the label parameters that are set this will take varying amounts of time. Clicking the Pause Labeling button on the Labelingtoolbar lets you suspend the drawing of labels while you continue to work with your data. This is useful when you are working with a heavily labeled map but do not need the features labeled for the task you are completing. Steps: 1. Click the Pause Drawing button whenever you want to suspend drawing. The Pause Drawing button is located in the lower left of the view window, next to the Refreshbutton and the horizontal scroll bar. You can also press F9 as a shortcut to pause drawing. 2. Click the button again to resume drawing. 13. Analyzing your map Analyzing your map helps you to improve the drawing performance of your ArcMap documents by generating a list of potential display performance issues—much like a spell checker in a word processing program. Each problem description guides you to suggested updates that you can make to your map layer to address the issue and improve map drawing performance. There are three types of messages in the Prepare window: Error Warning Message You can right-click each message to get a quick suggestion on how you can address that specific issue. This will also give you access to a help topic with more information, such as additional repair options. The item in bold in each list will provide the default approach for addressing each issue. Note: As you evaluate the results in the Prepare window you have the option to address or ignore messages and warnings. If you choose to ignore, you can mark as an exception by right-clicking the message or warning and choosing Mark As Exception. Steps: 1. Click File > Analyze Map on the main menu. The Prepare window with its list of Errors, Warnings, and Messages will be displayed. 14. Using page layouts A layout is a collection of map elements laid out and organized on a page. Common map elements include one or more data frames (each containing an ordered set of map layers), a scale bar, north arrow, map title, descriptive text, and a symbol legend. Layout view is where you add map surrounds, frames, graticules, and other finishing touches to a map. What you see on the layout is what you get if you print or export the map to the same page size. 15. Printing a map in ArcMap You use the Print tool to print a map in ArcMap. This sends your map to your desired printer. There are two printing tasks you can perform in ArcMap. You can: Print your data frame Print your layout Printing a data frame Here are the steps for printing the contents of the active data frame. This will print the existing display as shown in the current map extent of your data frame. Steps 1. Make sure that you are working in Data view in ArcMap—either by selecting View > Data View in the main menu or by clicking the Data View button in the lower left of the map canvas. 2. Pan and zoom your data frame until you have the desired map extent. 3. Click File > Print on the main menu, to print your data view. Printing a layout The layout is the map view that arranges various map elements onto a page for map printing. Here are the steps for printing the layout view of your map. Steps 1. Make sure you are working with the Layout View in ArcMap—either by selecting View > Layout View in the main menu or by clicking the Layout View button in the lower left of the map canvas. 2. Click File > Print on the main menu, to print your layout. Fitting a large layout onto the printer page From time to time, you may have the need to print a map whose layout page size is larger than your printer—for example, you may only have access to a document printer instead a large format plotter. Or you may want to create a huge wall map. You have two options: You can select Tile map to Printer Paper to tile the map into a number of pages for printing. You can select Scale Map to Fit Printer Paper to fit the map onto your printer paper. Tip: In cases where you will print maps as multiple tiles, it's helpful to create a test plot first. For example, you can print just a few tiles or create a simple layout with an empty data frame and a few other map elements. See About map printing for more information. Printing maps that have multiple pages There are a number of maps that you'll work with, which will contain multiple pages. For example, suppose you want to generate a map book (say to assemble a Tax Map book or a book of Emergency Response maps of your jurisdiction). In these cases, you can use an ArcMap capability called Data Driven Pages. This uses an index dataset where each feature defines the map extent for a specific map sheet. The attributes of the feature specify some of the map element properties for each map page (such as the map title or the filled area of interest that is displayed on an index map). Using Data Driven Pages starts by setting its use on the page and print setup dialog box and then defining how attributes will be used in page generation. For more information, see What are Data Driven Pages? 16. Saving a map After you finish working on a map, you can save it and exit ArcMap. You save a map as a document and store it on your hard disk. If you haven't saved the map before, you'll need to provide a name and save it into a folder location. ArcMap automatically appends a file extension (.mxd) to your map document name. The data displayed on a map is not saved with it. Map layers reference the data sources in your GIS database. This helps keep map documents relatively small in size. You can also save the map with its data using a map package, which can be used to share your map and its related data with other users. Saving to previous versions of ArcGIS In most cases, after you open and save an existing map document (.mxd file), the map can no longer be opened with earlier versions of ArcGIS because it will now reflect the new functionality. Similarly, new documents cannot be opened in earlier versions of the software; however, you can use the Save A Copy command to make a copy of a map document so you can open and work with it in previous versions of ArcGIS. Note that ArcGIS 10.1, 10.2, and 10.2.1 map documents are directly compatible with each other; ArcGIS 9.0 and 9.1 documents are also compatible with each other. Each new version of ArcGIS introduces functionality and properties that aren't available in previous versions. When you save a map document, layer file, or 3D document to a previous version of ArcGIS, the format of the file is changed to eliminate properties not available in the older version. This means saving to a previous version removes from the file any functionality that depends on the newer software. Therefore, some work may be lost if you save to a previous version and start working with the older copy again in the current ArcGIS product, as the new functionality was stripped out in the Save A Copy process. Your original file will still have the new functionality. In addition, when you save a map document to a previous version of the software, only the .mxd file is saved; the data sources referenced in the .mxd file remain unchanged. See the following sections for more information about geodatabases, data sources, and saving to previous versions. You can also save layer files in ArcMap and ArcGlobe and ArcGlobe and ArcScene documents to previous versions of ArcGIS. Geodatabases and saving map documents to previous versions If your organization uses different versions of ArcGIS, you need to confirm the ArcGIS release with which your geodatabase is associated, as it can have an impact on whether or not ArcGIS will be able to access the data referenced in the map. Newer versions of ArcGIS can read older geodatabases, but older versions of ArcGIS cannot read newer geodatabases except in the following cases: Starting with ArcGIS 10, the release number is associated with individual items within the geodatabase, rather than being applied to the entire geodatabase; therefore, the core geodatabase version did not change between 10.0, 10.1,10.2 and 10.2.1. Only datasets with newer functionality in these databases will be unopenable by the previous release. For best results in identifying such datasets, use ArcGIS 10.0 Service Pack 3 (SP3) or higher which can properly identify newer datasets. ArcGIS 9.2 Service Pack 5 (SP5) and Service Pack 6 (SP6) can open and edit a 9.3 geodatabase; however, 9.2 SP5/SP6 will not be able to open, edit, or create datasets containing new functionality available with ArcGIS 9.3, such as creating a terrain with a Window Size pyramid format or a network dataset with an attribute that uses the 9.3 global turn delay and network function evaluators. ArcGIS 9.1 and 9.0 geodatabases are directly compatible with each other. For example, if your map contains data from an ArcGIS 10.2.1 personal, file, or ArcSDE geodatabase, you can save the .mxd file so it can be opened in an ArcGIS 9.3 release, but 9.3 won't be able to display the newer data. Shapefiles, coverages, and file-based rasters don't present a problem in this regard. Existing geodatabases created using previous releases can be opened and used in the current release without being upgraded; however, to take advantage of new functionality, existing geodatabases must be upgraded. If you upgrade a geodatabase, you can't restore it for use in its original version of ArcGIS. For this reason, you may want to make a copy of the geodatabase before you upgrade. If you have data in a geodatabase that you have created or upgraded in the current version that you want to be able to work within an older version of ArcGIS, you have two options. In the current version, you can create a new, empty file geodatabase that can be opened in an older version using the Create File GDB geoprocessing tool, then in the current version, copy and paste the data from your geodatabase into that new, empty file geodatabase. This will create a geodatabase that can be opened in the older version; however, note that some items supported in newer geodatabases can't be pasted into a geodatabase intended for an older version if that version doesn't support them. Alternatively, in the current version, add the data into a map as a layer and create a layer package, which can be opened with ArcGIS 9.3.1 and newer. If you have multiple layers you want to prepare, you can create a group layer, then package that layer, or create separate layer packages for each layer. Some general points to remember when working with geodatabases from different ArcGIS releases include: Geodatabase functionality that is new at a particular release is only supported in map documents from the same release or higher. Geoprocessing toolboxes stored in upgraded geodatabases cannot be opened in previous releases. Similarly, once you make a change to a file-based toolbox (.tbx), it can no longer be accessed by the previous version. You can right-click a toolbox and click Save As and choose the release number to save it to, but you will need to make manual edits to consider any functionality in the toolbox that is not available in those releases. Parcel fabrics are only supported in ArcGIS 9.2 or newer geodatabases or map documents. Mosaic datasets are only supported in ArcGIS 10.0 or newer geodatabases or map documents. ArcGIS Network Analyst layers and network datasets are only supported in ArcGIS 9.1 or newer geodatabases or map documents. ArcGIS Schematics layers and schematic datasets are only supported in ArcGIS 9.0 or newer geodatabases and 9.1 or newer map documents. There are some limitations and guidelines with replication with geodatabases from different releases. Functionality and properties that are removed when saving to a previous release The following sections describe which functionality or properties may be changed when you save documents from the current release to an earlier release of ArcGIS. The headings represent the release numbers to which you are saving. Because ArcGIS 10.2.1, 10.2, and 10.1 are directly compatible, you do not need to perform any additional steps to use a document in either release; however, if you want to open the file in ArcGIS 10.0, you must use Save A Copy. When you do this, you are removing the new items available that 10.0 cannot read. Functionality from all intermediate releases is removed when you save to a release that is two or more versions older than the one you are using. For example, if you save from ArcGIS 10.2.1 to ArcGIS 9.2, you should review the sections listed under ArcGIS 10.0, ArcGIS 9.3, and ArcGIS 9.2 to understand the effects of the Save A Copyprocess. Saving to ArcGIS 10.0 Functionality or properties that are not supported when saving to all releases newer than ArcGIS 10.0 are also not available in 10.0. In addition, here are some other notes specific to saving to ArcGIS 10.0: ArcMap Label, display, and hyperlink macros that use Python expressions will be reverted to VBScript when saved to 10.0. The expression will remain so that it can be ported back to VBScript or JScript. Layers using new Maplex properties at 10.1, such as key numbering and label class level feature connection options, will lose these capabilities when saving to 10.0. Symbols using 32-bit PNG images will lose transparency when saved to 10.0. LAS dataset and WMTS layers will be dropped from the map when saving to 10.0. Map's displaying time data in live mode will lose that capability when saved to 10.0. Legends on the page layout will lose their dynamic, text wrapping, and columning abilities when saved to 10.0. Dot density renderers using the capability to maintain density by dot value will lose that capability. Feature service layers will be saved but will be unable to connect to the feature service in 10.0. Layers referencing geodatabase datasets with functionality specific to 10.1 will not be able to connect to these data sources in 10.0. Saving to ArcGIS 9.3 Functionality or properties that are not supported when saving to all releases newer than ArcGIS 9.3 are also not available in 9.3. In addition, here are some other notes specific to saving to ArcGIS 9.3: ArcMap The map document's default geodatabase property will be removed when saving to 9.3. Customized layer field ordering will be removed when a layer is saved to 9.3. The time properties of a layer will be removed when a layer is saved to 9.3. The time properties of the data frame will be removed when a layer is saved to 9.3. Field properties noting fields as highlighted or read-only will be removed when a layer is saved to 9.3. Dynamic text elements will be realized to static text when saving to 9.3. Mosaic layers will be dropped when saving to 9.3. Feature templates will be dropped when saving to 9.3. Group layer transparency can be set at both the sublayer and top-level group layer at ArcGIS 10. When saving to a previous version, the appearance of the map will be preserved in this situation, but the transparency values will change. Basemap layers will be converted to group layers when saved to 9.3. Accelerated raster layers will be converted to raster layers when saved to 9.3. Data-driven pages did not exist in ArcGIS 9.3 and will be dropped from the map document. The ability to automatically derive the extent of one data frame from another will be removed when saving to 9.3. Extent indicators will be rectangle indicators when saved to 9.3. Data frame clipping options for clipping specific layers will be removed when saving to 9.3. Layer symbology options for 3D rotation and field-driven sizing will be removed from the layer. Image format properties of dynamic service layers will be removed from service layers when saved to 9.3. Saving to ArcGIS 9.2 Functionality or properties that are not supported when saving to all releases newer than ArcGIS 9.2 are also not available in 9.2. In addition, here are some other notes specific to saving to ArcGIS 9.2: ArcMap In 10.0, when layers in a data frame are made transparent, the table of contents and the legends in layout view automatically use lighter colors to reflect transparency. This simulated transparency is removed when you save to 9.2. Dimension layers in 10.0 support a label-weight ranking so dimension features can be considered barriers to the labeling process. This property is removed when you save to 9.2. All layer types that support HTML pop-up properties will have their HTML pop-up properties removed. Fields with a saved sort order will have that order removed. JPEG 2000 picture elements will be removed. WCS layers will be removed from your data frame when you save to 9.2. The style name of a WMS layer will be removed from the layer. Field-based hyperlinks containing parameters will not work in releases prior to 9.3. If you save a 10.1 .mxd file to 9.2, parameters will automatically be removed from dynamic hyperlinks, but the links to the document will still work. NITF graphics layers will be removed from your data frame. Raster layers using the Discrete Color renderer will revert to a default renderer when you save to 9.2. The separator property of scale text will be removed from scale text graphics when you save to 9.2. Representation rules that are marked as hidden for legend display in 10.0 or higher will be visible when you save to 9.2. Network layers and network analysis layers referencing network datasets containing evaluators (global turn delay evaluators and function evaluators) will be saved in the 9.2 document but will be disconnected from their network dataset when opened in ArcGIS 9.2. Published map files (.pmf) created with ArcGIS Publisher in 10.0 or higher can't be opened in ArcReader 9.2 or earlier versions. If you need to create a .pmf file that can be opened by a previous version of ArcReader, you can save the .mxd file to a previous version and publish it on a machine with an older version of ArcGIS. Another option is for the recipient of the .pmf file to download and install ArcReader 10.0 for free. Geoprocessing Several software features are not available in ArcGIS 9.2 including Script tool properties for custom tool validation Model properties for storing symbology Enhancements to several data types that affect models ArcGlobe Stars and atmospheric halos in ArcGlobe are dropped when saving to 9.2. When consumed in 9.2, the cache for 10.0 or higher layers with full caching will be regenerated on demand. Some KML elements, such as screen overlays, COLLADA models, and so on, are dropped from Google Earth KML/KMZ files. With ArcGlobe, you can save a layer only to releases that will support it; for example, terrain layers are supported starting with 9.2. So when you save a terrain layer, you can save it as 9.3 or 9.2 (or the regular 10); you will not be able to save it as 9.0/9.1 because terrain layers were not supported in those releases. In addition, if there are any layers in your group layers that the version of ArcGIS you choose won't be able to draw, a dialog box will appear listing them. You can then decide whether to continue with saving the copy in the format of that previous version. If you have other Esri or third-party extensions, you should check with the manufacturer to determine their compatibility with previous versions of ArcGIS. Saving to ArcGIS 9.0/9.1 Functionality or properties that are not supported when saving to all releases newer than ArcGIS 9.0/9.1 are also not available in 9.0/9.1. In addition, here are some other notes specific to saving to ArcGIS 9.0/9.1: Layers based on data from any ArcGIS 9.2, 9.3, or 10.0 geodatabase are not supported. In addition, any new data source or layer type, such as tables based on Microsoft Excel data, are not supported. Symbols and properties new to ArcGIS 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, or 10.1 aren't available in ArcGIS 9.1. These include new document properties, new rendering and display options, custom full extents, and so on. Graphs created in ArcGIS 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, or 10.1 are not supported and will be removed; however, if you use the graphing tools from the ArcGIS 9.3 Customize dialog box, the graphs will work in ArcGIS 9.1. Animations in .mxd files are dropped when saving to 9.1; however, you can save animations in .sxd or .3dd files back to 9.1 as long as the animations do not have time tracks. New 3D properties, layers, and functionality, such as Google Earth KML/KMZ files, graphics layers, annotation, and text, are not supported. The Goode Homolosine projection, which was new at 9.2, is unknown to 9.1. Saving to ArcGIS 8.3 Functionality or properties that are not supported when saving to all releases newer than ArcGIS 8.3 are also not available in 8.3. In addition, here are some other notes specific to saving to ArcGIS 8.3: If you have updated geodatabase annotation feature classes from ArcGIS 8.3 to ArcGIS 9.0 or higher, you will be unable to open the geodatabase in ArcGIS 8.3 because you are required to upgrade the geodatabase first. Symbols and properties new to ArcGIS 9.0 or higher aren't available in ArcGIS 8.3; for example, 3D text elements aren't supported, and 3D symbols will be converted to 2D symbols. Paragraph text elements aren't supported in ArcGIS 8.3 and will be dropped. Symbol-level drawing is a property of a data frame at ArcGIS 8.3, but is a property of the layers for which it is defined at ArcGIS 9.0 or higher. When saved to ArcGIS 8.3, the supported aspects of the layer's symbol-level drawing are retained and added to the data frame's Advanced Drawing Options dialog box. Data frame masking properties aren't supported, and no masking will occur. If ArcGIS 8.3 can read your masking layers, they'll appear in your map but will be drawn just like other layers. Data frames labeled with the Maplex Label Engine in ArcGIS 9.0 or higher will be labeled with the Standard Labeling Engine. ArcGIS Map Server and WMS layers aren't supported in 8.3. Projections new at ArcGIS 9.0 or higher are unknown to ArcGIS 8.3. These are: Goode Homolosine projection, Fuller projection, Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic (RSO) projection, Cube map projection, Transverse Mercator Complex projection, Robinson projection (ArcGIS for Desktop Advanced)—the same version of Robinson supported in ArcGIS for Desktop Advanced Workstation, Local Cartesian projection. Some page and printer setup options aren't retained. Stereo views in ArcScene aren't supported. ArcGIS Tracking Analyst properties aren't supported. How to save a map to a previous version of ArcGIS Steps: 1. Click File > Save A Copy. 2. Navigate to the location where you want to save the map document. 3. Type a file name. 4. Click the Save as type drop-down arrow and click the release to which version you want to save. Note: If you choose ArcMap Document (the option without a version number), the map will be saved in the current version of the software. 5. Click Save. Note: The previous version map document will be saved to disk, and your current version document will remain open. If there are any layers in your current document that the previous version won't be able to draw, a dialog box will appear listing them. You can then decide whether to continue with saving the copy in the previous format. Tip: The Save A Copy command is different from the Save As command. The Save As command allows you to save your document with a new name, or file location. When you use the Save As command, the new Save As document is loaded as the current document in the application. With the Save A Copy command, you are saving a copy of the document to disk, and the document is not reloaded in the application. In addition, the Save A Copy command can also be used to save a document so it can be opened in a previous version of ArcGIS. 17. Adding data from ArcGIS Online ArcGIS Online contains galleries of many online GIS data sources that you can connect to and use in ArcMap. This topic describes how to add online data from ArcGIS Online. There are some occasions, where a user will want to change from the default ArcGIS online portal (e.g. http://www.arcgis.com) and switch to an organization's portals (e.g. http://myportal.company.com). This can be done using Manage Portal Connections via the ArcGIS Administrator. Steps 1. Click the Add Data arrow and click Add data from ArcGIS Online. The ArcGIS online window appears. You can search, read about, and use various online data sources at ArcGIS Online. 2. Note: 3. The data you see will depend on which portal you are connected to. 4. Click Sign In. As an ArcGIS user, you can use your global login to view your content and other group content whose access may be restricted for selected users. 5. Search for content using the Search interface. Tip: Use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard in your searches. 6. Browse entries in the window. To see more details on any item, click the Details button. 7. Click Add in this window to add selected online content to ArcMap. 18. Using search in ArcGIS ArcGIS includes the ability to index your GIS content, search for the data, and put the results to work quickly—for example, you can quickly search for data regardless of where the data is located on your disk. You can also search for geoprocessing tools without navigating the tool hierarchy in the toolbox window. Search is accessed through the Search window. The Search window is also used to configure and manage how search is used—for example, to identify the file folders, geodatabases, and servers that you want to search against. Preparing to use search Ensure that you have set your search properties before using the search. To do this, identify the set of folders on your local computer or network as well as any geodatabase connections that you want to search against. See the Reviewing and setting your indexing options section below for more information. Updating and maintaining your search index Since you are periodically creating new datasets and modifying or replacing existing ones, it's possible that your search index will not reflect the latest status of your contents. You can use the Search Options dialog box to control how often your index is rebuilt or to re-create it on demand. This will help when searching in workspace folders and geodatabases that undergo a lot of change. See the Reviewing and setting your indexing options section below for more information. Searching for items Use the Search window to search for items: 1. Open the Search window by clicking the Search window button or clicking Windows > Search on the main menu. 2. This will display the Search window in which you can search for GIS items and review the results. Note: If you are interested in searching for raster data, see Searching for images in ArcGIS. Viewing and working with search results Search results are displayed in the results window. You can perform several operations on each search result: Clicking on a search result item name will open it. For example, you can click on a map document name to open it in ArcMap; clicking on a dataset name will add it to ArcMap as a new layer; clicking on a geoprocessing tool will open it for execution; and so on. Right-click each result item name to show more actions on the item. Hover over a search result name to view its item description in a pop-up window. Note that this option is turned off by default. You can enable it using the Search Options button on the Search window. Click on the result snippet (that is, the short phrase under each item name) to open the item description. This is often a useful place, not just for viewing item information, but to make notes and updates to the description. For example, you may have found the perfect dataset to support a particular task. You can capture that as a note in the description. Click on the path/link to navigate to that item in your Catalog window. For example, when you find the relevant geoprocessing tool, you can click on the link to see in which toolbox that tool is located. Click the thumbnail to create/update the thumbnail for your item. Sorting and grouping results By default, search results are sorted by relevance. You can change the sort order by clicking the Sort By link and choosing a different field to sort search results. When appropriate, you can also sort results in ascending/descending order. Note: Spatial Relevance is enabled only in the context of spatial search. See the next section on spatial search for more details. Search results are also grouped by data type for your convenience. Click the Search returned items link to see the grouping of your results. You can quickly see the breakdown of your results by type as shown below: Check desired types and click Apply Filters to narrow down your search results to show only a subset of relevant results. Click the Remove Filters or the Back button on theSearch toolbar to go back to previous search results. Note: ArcGIS Online searches groups showing the first 300 results only. Map-based spatial search Spatial search is tied to your map. In other words, search results are restricted to the current visible extent on your map. As you zoom or pan your map, the search results update to reflect the data within or overlapping your current visible extent. The behavior is similar to searching for restaurants or other landmarks in Google Maps. As you zoom or pan your Google map, it automatically refreshes results in the current visible extent. By default, you search for data in any extent ignoring the current visible extent of your map. In other words, the map-based spatial search is turned off by default. To enable spatial searching, click Any Extent and choose either the Within Current Extent or Within Or Overlapping Current Extent option. After you choose one of these two options, as you pan or zoon your map, the Search window automatically reflects the results relevant to the current extent of your map. You can turn off the spatial search filter at any time by choosing the Any Extent option. Note: Add at least one layer to your current map to enable these choices. These options are always disabled in ArcCatalog as spatial search is not supported in ArcCatalog. Text-based spatial search Map-based spatial search works well when you know the geographic extent of your map as you've seen in the above section. Sometimes you know the geography only by its geographic name, and you want the software to figure out the geographic extent. In such cases, text-based spatial search helps you locate relevant data based on geographic names. Examples of text-based spatial searches include: Parcel data in Redlands, CA Data near Paris, France The keywords in and near have special meaning in ArcGIS search. If a well-defined geographic name followed by these keywords in search strings is detected, spatial filters are automatically applied based on the geography, and relevant results are found in that geographic extent. If the name has multiple geographic locations, you can pick the desired one from the drop-down list as shown below: You can optionally zoom your map to a specific geographic location. This option is turned off by default but can be enabled within the Search Options window's Generaltab. Map scale and spatial search Datasets can render well only at certain scale levels and become irrelevant when you are viewing very large- or small-scale maps. Spatial search is tied to the current map extent and, therefore, map scale becomes an important factor in returning relevant search results based on the current visible extent. For example, when you are working with a map at global scale, data relevant to small cities and neighborhoods becomes irrelevant, and you may not want to see it in the search results. By default, the scale-based spatial filter is turned off. You can turn it on using the drop- down menu on the Search Options button as shown below: Note: Map scales are not derived intrinsically. You must input relevant levels for your datasets as part of documenting your item description. Without this information you may not get the appropriate results when you enable this option. SeeDocumenting Items in the Catalog window for more information. Search using synonyms Synonyms are a group of words that are roughly synonymous in a given context. When you search for a word, you can retrieve results that contain words with the same or similar meaning. For example, when you search for the word route, you may also want to find results related to roads, streets, railroads, waterways, and flight paths. To trigger searching for synonyms, prefix your search terms with $. Example: Searching for route yields nine results: Searching for $route yields 46 results: User-defined synonyms The supported built-in synonyms are very generic terms and are not designed to work with GIS- specific terms. You can customize terms by defining your organization-specific GIS terms and placing them under your user profile. Use the following steps to create custom synonyms to use in desktop search: 1. Go to your user profile directory located at ..\ESRI\Desktop10.2\ArcCatalog\SearchIndex\Synonyms\UserDefined. 2. Edit the UserDefinedSynonyms.xml file and add your own user-defined synonyms. Follow the comments in the .xml file to define synonyms. 3. Save the file. 4. In the search window, search for your custom synonyms using the $ prefix. Useful search tips Here are some useful things to think about when you use ArcGIS search. Use search categories (All, Maps, Data, Tools, or Images) to narrow your search results. Use tags when you are documenting your items. Tags can be very useful when searching. Use wildcards (*) when searching. Typing part of a word or phrase followed by * will aid in searches—for example, you could enter land* when searching for land base or land use. It's good to understand what folders, geodatabases, and servers you are searching against. See the section below to set up ArcGIS search properties on your computer. It's often useful to edit the item description as part of viewing search results. Click the snippet so a search result will display its Item Description. You can then edit that description as part of the search experience. See Documenting Items in the Catalog window for more information. The Search window provides other helpful hints. Click on Help in the Search window to learn more. Identifying what to search ArcGIS search has a few important ways to target your search, which are described here. Performing a local search—On the main menu, you can identify that you want to perform a local search or an enterprise search. Choosing Local Search means that you want to search your computer, the folder connections, and the SDE connections that you have set in your Catalog window. Performing an enterprise search—Choose Enterprise to perform an enterprise-wide search using search services published using ArcGIS for Server. You can add search services from the Search Options dialog box. Performing an ArcGIS Online search—Choose ArcGIS Online to search for content on ArcGIS Online. To log in to ArcGIS Online from the desktop, click File > Sign-in. If you are logged in as a member of an organization, by default your search results will only include items that are available within your organization. If your organization's administrator lets you search for items that are publicly available from ArcGIS Online, include them in your search results using the drop-down menu on the Search Options button as shown below: Reviewing and setting your indexing options You can manage the search properties in the Search Options dialog box. Building a search index is important so that your search results are fast and accurate. Using default settings will typically serve most users very well. However, you can use this dialog box to modify certain settings, for example: To identify which folders and database connections to index To set how often the search index is updated for new items To say how frequently you want to re-create the item index To generate thumbnails at index time (This option is turned off by default.) To define how many indexers to use for parallel indexing You can also manually control immediate indexing to update, pause, or reindex your ArcGIS contents. Open the Search Options dialog box by clicking the Search Options button on the Search window. 1. On the Search Options dialog box, you can review and set the folders and other database connections that you want to index for searching. You can review the current connections in the Register Folders and Server Connections box. Use the Add and Remove buttons to manage this list of connections. These are used to establish connections to a number of workspace folders, geodatabases, toolboxes, and other resources. Here is a list of connections you can manage for ArcGIS search: Folder Connections —These are any additional workspace folders to which you have established a connection. You'll see their contents listed under each folder. Personal geodatabases —Used to organize datasets in a file geodatabase. Toolboxes —This node is used to organize and access geoprocessing tools. Interoperability Connections —Used to access a number of special data formats in the optional Data Interoperability extension product. This is used to access Safe Software's FME product for GIS data interoperability. Database Server Connections —Used to connect as the administrator to geodatabases that are stored and managed in SQL Server Express. Database Connections —Used to connect to databases and enterprise geodatabases. Check the option to create thumbnails if you wish to automatically generate thumbnails at index time. Please note that checking this option will slow down the indexing process considerably. Thumbnails generated at index time are temporary thumbnails and will only be used in the search results window. Deleting the index will also delete thumbnails. These thumbnails will not be saved as part of the item description or the metadata for your items. We recommend creating thumbnails as part of documenting your items. See Documenting Items in the Catalog window for more information. By default, only one indexer is used. Parallel indexing can speed up the index generation, especially when you work with a lot of data. The parallel process allocates indexers based on the number of folders that are registered. If the number of indexers is greater than the number of registered folders, then the parallel process will allocate indexers to the subfolders. Below are a few tips for setting the number of indexers: It is recommended that you manage your data in folders and subfolders. Storing all your data into a single folder will not take advantage of parallel indexing. The number of indexers should be less than the number of folders (including subfolders). For example, if your data is stored in two folders, then only 2 indexers will be used by the system. When indexing data that is stored on a slow disk or over a slow network, it is recommended that you set the number of indexers to be equal to half the number of CPUs on your client—this will give you the best possible performance. It is a best practice to make sure that the number of indexers never exceeds the number of CPUs. 2. On the General tab, you can set spatial search options and enable built-in and user-defined synonyms. 3. On the Advanced tab, you can review and set Search Services in the Register Enterprise Search Services box. Use the Add and Remove buttons to manage the search service list of connections. 19. etting ArcMap options You have the ability to establish a number of preferences for ArcMap and your map document on the ArcMap Options dialog box. Once set, these options are saved as properties of your map document and are used each time the map document is opened in subsequent sessions or until they are changed. To open the ArcMap Options dialog box, click Customize > ArcMap Options on the main menu. This dialog box includes a number of tabs. Each tab corresponds to specific options you can set and use: General—Enable options for the application. Data View—Enable hardware acceleration and coordinate display in your map's data frames. Also set default label engine and font name and size for .mxds. Layout View—Enable options for page unit guides and grids and for snapping various map elements to these page locations. Metadata—Set the metadata style and update rules. Tables—Enable options for table appearance, prompts and warnings for various table states, and attribute join properties. Raster—Enable properties for band combinations for multiband display and rules for pyramid generation. CAD—Enable options for recognizing DGN files. Sharing—Enable options for packaging and publishing. Display Cache—Enable properties to specify the cache location, clear an existing cache, and view its size. General options Here you can set options for the application. These include defining ArcMap's startup behavior. Here you can set ArcMap to automatically do the following: Turn off the ArcMap splash screen. Open the ArcMap Getting Started dialog box. Open the Add Data dialog box. Open the last saved map document. Other options available on this tab include: Change the default visibility of newly added layers. Set Add Data to use the last location accessed instead of the home folder of the current map document. Display wizards if available. Use relative paths to reference data in new map documents. Using relative paths doesn't mean that the layers in your document will never need repairing. Even with relative paths, it is still possible for a document to be unable to find its data sources if the document or the data sources are moved to a different location relative to each other, such as to a different part of the folder hierarchy or to a different disk. To review or change this setting for your current document, click File > Map Document Properties to open the Map Document Properties dialog box. Caution: This option has no impact on your currently open map document or your existing map documents. It just determines what the default is for new map documents you create. Set the default layer when identifying features. Choose the highlight color for features containing hyperlinks. Keep drawing tools active after creating the graphic. This option allows you to easily draw multiple graphics. The ArcMap default behavior automatically activates theSelect Elements tool to allow you to immediately manipulate the graphic. Define the behavior of the mouse wheel and Continuous Zoom/Pan tools when navigating data frames and layouts. Note: These settings apply to all your ArcMap sessions, not only your current map document. They are saved as registry settings for the ArcMap application. Data View options On this tab, you can set how you work with your map when you are in data view: Enable continuous display during navigation when connected through a remote desktop session. When continuous display is enabled, ArcMap updates the display of basemap layers continuously during navigation operations such as pan and zoom. When continuous display is not enabled, ArcMap updates the display of basemap layers only after navigation is completed. This option has no effect on basemap layer display updates when not connected via remote desktop. This setting is not recommended for remote desktop sessions over low- bandwidth connections. This setting is applied over all .mxds. Enable hardware acceleration. Hardware acceleration improves the refresh rate of supported layers, such as basemap layers and any raster layers accelerated with the Image Analysis window during navigation. If this check box is unavailable, it indicates that this session of ArcMap cannot utilize hardware acceleration. This can occur if ArcMap is running over a remote desktop session or on a computer whose graphics hardware's drivers are out of date or corrupted, or if the computer's graphics hardware does not support the necessary functionality. This setting is applied over all .mxds. Customize coordinate display in your map's data frames. This refers to the x,y coordinate readout in the status bar at the bottom of the ArcMap window and in the feedback you get in the status bar when you draw graphics with the tools from the Draw toolbar. Options include setting the number of decimals, using thousands separators, and padding values with zeros. This setting is stored in the current map document (.mxd file) and only applies to this map. By default, ArcMap displays the x,y coordinate readout in the bottom right-hand corner of the ArcMap window in the display units of the data frame. Display units are set on the General tab of the Data Frame Properties dialog box (View > Data Frame Properties). You can choose to use different units to display the coordinates. This option does not affect the units used to report the dimensions of graphics that you draw with the tools from the Draw toolbar or of features you create or edit in an edit session using the Editor toolbar. The length, area, and perimeter of graphics that you draw are always reported in display units. When you edit features, their dimensions are reported in the map units of the data you are editing; when you enter x,y coordinates while editing, they are also specified in map units. Setting the x,y display units is useful if you are experimenting with different coordinate systems for your map and you want the x,y coordinate readout to remain unchanged. When you change the coordinate system of a data frame on the Data Frame Properties dialog box, Display defaults to the map units of the coordinate system you choose. By using this option to override the display units, you can keep the x,y readout in the status bar constant. Set default labeling properties. By default, new .mxds open using the Standard Label Engine. You can change the default label engine to the Maplex Label Engine and set a different font name and size for labeling. This will not change the label engine and font for existing .mxds, only for newly created projects. Note: When new annotation feature classes are created, they will also use the default label engine, font name, and font size set here. Layout View options Here you can enable options for working with the page layout: Set the layout view appearance. You can choose to stretch contents when the window is resized. By default, ArcMap does not stretch the contents of the window. You can show horizontal and vertical guides to help you precisely place elements on the page layout. These can be preset in a template. By default, ArcMap displays a dashed line around the active data frame. The active data frame is the one to which commands that you use, such as Add Data, Full Extent, Select By Attributes, and Zoom To Selected Features, are applied when you are working in layout view. The dashed line is not part of your map layout and does not appear on your map when you print it. However, you may sometimes want to hide this indication, for example, if you want to view your map exactly as it will appear when printed. If you turn off the active data frame indication, you can still see which data frame is active by looking in the table of contents: the active data frame's name is always shown in bold. Show and customize rulers along the page layout. Rulers are displayed by default. Show and customize a grid within the page layout. The grid is not on by default. Grids can be preset in a template. Enable snapping properties. This allows you to snap page layout elements, such as a legend or north arrow, to any or all of these: guides, grids, rulers, and printer margins. If you have chosen more than one, you can set snapping priority by reordering the list of guides, grids, rulers, or margins. Checked entries at the top of the list take priority over checked entries lower down the list. For rulers, elements are snapped to the ruler's smallest division. To snap to the printer's margin, Use Printer Paper Settings must be checked for Map Page Size on the Print Setup dialog box (File > Page and Print Setup); otherwise, elements snap to the page edge if Margins is checked. A check box on that dialog box also lets you choose whether the printer margins are shown in layout view. These settings are stored in the current map document (.mxd file) and just apply to this map. Metadata options Here you can set the metadata style and update rules. A metadata style configures ArcGIS to create the metadata you want. It controls how you view metadata and also the pages that appear for editing metadata on the Description tab. It identifies the metadata standard or profile to be followed, the XML schema defining the valid XML format for that standard, and how to export metadata from ArcGIS to a stand-alone metadata XML file in that format. Choose the style from the available list. The default style, Item Description, lets you create a brief description for an item that can be searched in ArcGIS and published to ArcGIS Online. This metadata style is best for individuals who don't need complete access to metadata or for organizations that don't need to adhere to metadata standards. If you want to see or edit more information than is available with the Item Description metadata style or you must create metadata that complies with a metadata standard, choose another metadata style that provides access to an item's complete ArcGIS metadata. By default, ArcGIS automatically creates metadata if it doesn't already exist and updates existing metadata for you. When you view metadata, elements that were updated automatically have an asterisk (*) next to their name or value. If you choose not to automatically create metadata, you can still create metadata for an item by editing it on the Description tab, but the metadata isn't updated automatically when you view it; metadata is still updated automatically when other operations are performed. Tip: Choosing not to create metadata automatically can increase the speed with which you can view metadata because the update won't be performed. Advanced users who are creating metadata for publication for datasets that are still in production can also uncheck this option until they are ready to generate the final metadata. You can use the Synchronize Metadata geoprocessing tool to update an item's metadata at any time. Tables options This tab provides a number of options that you can use to customize the way attributes are displayed in tables. Font, color, and size are properties that can be changed for attribute values, while color and cell sizes can be adjusted for the entire table. You can use characters to indicate indexed fields, display domain and subtype descriptions, and set field properties on the Layer Properties dialog box that are honored by the table. Also, you can set application behavior when performing attribute joins. Raster options There are several options that can be defined to modify how your raster data is displayed. This allows you to save time and display your raster data consistently. On this tab, you can enable properties of raster datasets, raster catalogs, raster layers, and mosaic datasets. These settings apply to all ArcGIS for Desktop applications. Changing any setting here changes it for all the applications. CAD options Here you can enable the option for recognizing MicroStation DGN files. MicroStation allows you to assign any file extension to design files. This setting enables ArcGIS to recognize these types of files as CAD drawings and CAD feature datasets. This support only applies to three-character file extension names. If this setting is not enabled, ArcGIS only recognizes files with .dgn file extensions as MicroStation design files. These settings apply to all ArcGIS for Desktop applications. Changing any setting here changes it for all the applications. Sharing options The Sharing tab provides options for both publishing and packaging. Publishing options include an option to change the publishing staging path along with an option to automatically save the document when publishing. The staging path is the location where a map is staged before it is published. You can override this folder from an ArcGIS Server connection in ArcCatalog. This is also the default location for staged (saved) service definitions. You can override this location for an individual service definition within the Share As Service wizard. The publishing process requires that the document be saved before it is published. You will be prompted to save the document before publishing and staging a service definition. Choosing to automatically save the document will keep you from having to interactively save the document every time you publish or save a service definition. When publishing a cached service, ArcGIS returns a warning message box when the estimated cache exceeds a given size. You can change the threshold for the warning by entering a new size. If you do not want the warning message to appear, uncheck Show warning when cache exceeds. Note: These settings do not affect the analyzers associated with the estimated size of the cache you are about to create and the available space on the server. These analyzers will still trigger if the estimated size of your cache may (warning 24050), or will (error 00149), exceed the available space on the server. For packaging, this tab has an option to support ArcGIS runtime tools when creating a map package. Once enabled, you will see this option in the Share as Map Packagewizard. You can also choose the location to unpack packages. Display Cache options The display cache is a local disk cache on your computer that stores data for basemap layers, tiled images from cached map services from ArcGIS for Server, tiled images from other Internet map services, and the ArcGIS globe cache. ArcGIS for Desktop uses this display cache to help manage and improve display performance in ArcMap and ArcGlobe. Here you can enable properties to specify the cache location, clear an existing cache, and view its size. 20. Map automation using geoprocessing Geoprocessing is the methodical execution of a sequence of operations on geographic information. While geoprocessing is certainly used for spatial analysis, it can also be used for automating a wide range of mapping tasks—for example, to generate map books and multipage map atlases, to repair broken data links of all the map documents in a folder, and so on. If you are new to the use of geoprocessing in ArcGIS, read and learn more at What is geoprocessing? Learn more about using geoprocessing scripts for map document management and output once you have become familiar with geoprocessing. 21. Using ArcGIS extension products rcGIS for Desktop has a set of optional extension products that you can install and work with. Each adds a set of specialized and advanced capabilities to your geographic information system (GIS). Enabling extensions for ArcGIS for Desktop To add the capability to use any extension, ensure that the extension software is installed on your computer and that you have added keycodes to unlock the use of the software on your desktop. See Adding additional installation features for more information on how to add extensions. Next, enable the desired extension using the following steps: 1. Click Customize > Extensions from the main menu in any ArcGIS application. 2. In the Extensions dialog box, choose the extensions that you want to enable and click Close. 22. Keyboard shortcuts in ArcMap The following lists some of the keyboard shortcuts available in ArcMap, although many of these also apply to ArcGlobe and ArcScene. In addition, there are keyboard shortcuts available when editing and working with tables in ArcMap. You can also assign your own keyboard shortcuts to a command. Download ArcGIS for Desktop: A Selection of Time-Saving Tips and Shortcuts, a printable PDF of tips and shortcuts. Click inside the table of contents and click F1 to open a list of shortcuts while working in ArcMap. Accessing ArcMap menu commands The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts for some common commands: Shortcut Command Menu CTRL+N New File CTRL+O Open File CTRL+S Save File ALT+F4 Exit File CTRL+Z Undo Edit CTRL+Y Redo Edit CTRL+X Cut Edit CTRL+C Copy Edit CTRL+V Paste Edit DELETE Delete Edit F1 ArcGIS for Desktop Help Help Keyboard shortcuts used to access ArcMap menu commands To access the main menu, press ALT and use the arrow keys to move through the menus; press ENTER to make a selection. Press ESC to close a menu or dialog box. Window handling CTRL+F opens the Search window. ESC moves the focus from the Catalog window or the Table Of Contents window to the map display. F3 puts the focus to the Table Of Contents window. Hold down CTRL while dragging a toolbar or dockable window to prevent it from docking. To dock or undock any dockable window, double-click its title bar, or if it is stacked with another docked window, double-click its tab. Refreshing or suspending map drawing Press F5 to refresh and redraw the display. Press F9 whenever you want to suspend or pause drawing so you can make changes to your map without having the map redraw after each change. Press F9 again to resume drawing. Dragging and dropping to move or copy You can drag and drop or copy and paste multiple layers in the table of contents and between ArcMap sessions. You can also drag and drop or copy and paste data frames between ArcMap sessions. Use drag and drop to move layers in and out of a group layer within a data frame. Layers that are dragged and dropped between data frames and ArcMap sessions are copied; hold down CTRL while dragging and dropping to move layers between data frames and ArcMap sessions. Data frames that are dragged and dropped are moved; hold down CTRL while dragging and dropping to copy them. Layers that are dragged and dropped inside a data frame are moved; hold down CTRL while dragging and dropping to copy them. Similarly, in ArcCatalog, you can hold down CTRL while dragging and dropping to copy items. Navigating the table of contents with the keyboard F3 or clicking inside the table of contents puts the keyboard focus on the table of contents so you can navigate and interact with it. ESC or clicking the map puts the keyboard focus on the map. HOME selects the first item in the table of contents. END selects the last item in the table of contents. PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN arrows move through the items in the table of contents. Left/Right arrows or the + and - keys expand or collapse selected items. They also toggle among the tabs at the bottom of the table of contents when they have keyboard focus. SPACE turns drawing of the selected layers on or off. CTRL+SPACE turns all the layers in the data frame on or off when a single layer is selected in the table of contents. If the selected layer is part of a group layer or a composite layer, such as an ArcIMS image service layer, all the members of that layer will be turned on or off. If multiple layers are selected, CTRL+SPACE works like SPACE by itself and toggles only the selected layers on or off. F2 renames the selected item. F12 or ENTER opens the selected item's properties dialog box. If the currently selected item is a heading, symbol, or label, the Layer Properties dialog box will open with the Symbology tab shown on top. SHIFT+F10 (or the APPLICATION key, if your keyboard has one) opens the shortcut menu for the selected item. Use SHIFT+F1 or F1 to obtain context help when an item has keyboard focus or when the properties dialog box tab or a table of contents tab is selected. F11 activates a selected data frame, or hold down ALT and click a data frame to activate it. When there are multiple data frames in the map, use CTRL+TAB to cycle through each data frame and activate it. Using mouse shortcuts in the table of contents CTRL+click an expansion control (+/-) to expand or collapse all the items at that level. If any items are currently selected, only the selected items are expanded or collapsed. CTRL+click selects or deselects multiple layers or data frames. SHIFT+click selects all layers or data frames between two layers or data frames within the same table of contents level. ALT+click a data frame to activate it. CTRL+click a layer's check box turns all the layers on or off at that level. If any items are currently selected, only the selected items are turned on or off. ALT+click a layer's check box turns that layer on and turns off all others at that level. ALT+click a layer's name to zoom to the extent of that layer. This saves having to right-click a layer and click Zoom To Layer. When dragging layers, hover the pointer over an expansion control to expand or collapse any item. Right-clicking features, layers, and data frames always opens a shortcut menu. Navigating maps and layout pages Hold down the following keys to temporarily turn the tool you are currently using into a navigation tool: Z—Zoom In X—Zoom Out C—Pan B—Continuous Zoom/Pan (Drag with mouse button zooms in/out; drag with right mouse button pans.) Q—Roam (Hold down mouse wheel until cursor changes, then drag or hold Q.) These shortcuts work in data view and layout view. In layout view, they apply to the page by default. Hold down SHIFT as well as the key to apply it to the data frame you click instead of the page. For more map navigation shortcuts, see Quick ways to navigate data frames and layouts. Opening and closing table windows CTRL+double-click a layer or table in the table of contents to open its table. CTRL+T or CTRL+ENTER to open the table of the selected layer or table in the table of contents. CTRL+SHIFT+T to minimize or maximize all open table windows. CTRL+SHIFT+F4 to close all open table windows. For more table shortcuts, see Keyboard shortcuts for working with tables. 23. Navigating Maps 23.1. Displaying maps in data view and layout view ArcMap provides two ways to view a map: data view and layout view. Data view Layout view Each view allows you to view and interact with the map, but in different ways. Data view provides a geographic window for exploring, displaying, and querying the data on your map. You work in real- world coordinates and measurements in data view. In layout view, you work with the map layout elements, such as titles, north arrows, and scale bars, along with the data frame, all of which are arranged on a page. In layout view, you work primarily in page space (typically, inches or centimeters) except when you are interacting with a data frame in your layout. Switching between data view and layout view Use the buttons at the bottom left of the ArcMap window to switch between data view and layout view . You can also use this menu to refresh your map display and to pause drawing. An alternative way to switch your display is to click View > Data View or View > Layout View from the main menu in ArcMap. Tip: You can toggle the display of scroll bars in data view and layout view by clicking View > Scroll Bars. This setting is independent in each view, so to hide scroll bars in both views, you'll need to change the setting in both places. Navigation in a data frame The Tools toolbar is one of the primary ways that you interact with geographic information displayed in the data frame. It contains tools for working with the contents within the active data frame, for example, to pan and zoom your map, to identify features, and to measure distances. Functions on the Tools toolbar Button Name Function Zoom In Allows you to zoom in to a geographic window by clicking a point or dragging a box. Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out from a geographic window by clicking a point or dragging a box. Pan Allows you to pan the data frame. Full Extent Allows you to zoom to the full extent of your map. Fixed Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the center of your data frame. Fixed Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out on the center of your data frame. Back Allows you to go back to the previous extent. Forward Allows you to go forward to the next extent. Select Features Allows you to select features graphically, by clicking or dragging a box around them. You can also use the Select By Polygon, Lasso, Circle, and Line tools to select features using graphics drawn to the screen. Clear Selection Unselects all the currently selected features in the active data frame. Select Elements Allows you to select, resize, and move text, graphics, and other objects placed on the map. Identify Identifies the geographic feature or place on which you click. Hyperlink Triggers hyperlinks from features. HTML Pop-up Triggers HTML pop-up windows from features. Measure Measures distances and areas on your map. Find Finds features in the map. Find Route Allows you to calculate point-to-point routes and driving directions. Go To XY Location Allows you to type an x,y location and navigate to it. Open Time Slider Window Opens a time slider window for working with time-aware layers and tables. Create Viewer Window Allows you to create a new viewer window by dragging a rectangle. You can also use the mouse and keyboard, as well as other shortcuts, for data view navigation. For example, you can use the thumbwheel to zoom in and out on your map. For more information, see Quick ways to navigate data frames and layouts. Tip: If any of the navigation tools on the Standard toolbar are unavailable, the data frame may be set to either a fixed extent or fixed scale. To enable the navigation tools, click View > Data Frame Properties to open the Data Frame Properties dialog box, then click the Data Frame tab and choose Automatic from the Extent list. If your layer doesn't draw when you zoom in or out, it probably has a visible scale range set that prevents it from being displayed on the map at certain scales. You can clear the scale range by right-clicking the layer in the table of contents and clicking Visible Scale Range > Clear Scale Range. Navigation in layout view When you are working with a page layout, you are working in page units (for example, inches or centimeters). The Layout toolbar provides navigation tools for working in layout view. Navigation tools on the Layout toolbar Button Name Function Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on your layout by clicking a point or dragging a box. Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out on your layout by clicking a point or dragging a box. Pan Allows you to pan the layout. Zoom Whole Page Allows you to zoom to full layout extent. Zoom to 100% Allows you to zoom to 1:1 page scale. Fixed Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the center of your layout. Fixed Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out from the center of your layout. Go Back To Extent Allows you to go back to the previous extent. Go Forward To Extent Allows you to go forward to the next extent. Zoom To Percent Allows you to set the page size using a percentage. You can also use the mouse and keyboard as well, as other shortcuts for layout navigation, using the same shortcuts and quick keys as in data view. For more information, see Quick ways to navigate data frames and layouts. 23.2. Setting a custom full extent for your data frame Clicking the Full Extent button on the Tools toolbar zooms your map to show you all the data in your map. In one click, you can see everything in your map. Sometimes, though, clicking the Full Extent button zooms you out much further than desired. In these cases, you might like to set your own full extent. For example, in a map of France, you might have layers that cover the world, and clicking Full Extent will zoom you out to the whole world. You can specify a custom extent, such as France, as the full extent of your data frame. Then, when you click the Full Extent button, you are taken just to your area of interest. Tip: You can also press the INSERT key to zoom to the full extent. Steps for setting a custom full extent Each data frame can have its own custom full extent, which is set in the Data Frame Properties dialog box. Here are the steps: 1. Right-click the Data Frame name in the table of contents and click Properties. 2. Click the Data Frame tab. 3. In the Extent Used by Full Extent Command section, click Other and click the Specify Extent button. 4. This displays the Full Extent dialog box where you can set your custom extent. You can choose to Use the current extent of your data frame. Use the outline of features in a particular layer (and choose all features, selected features, or those that are visible). Use the outline of selected graphics. Type in your own coordinate values (in decimal degrees or display units) to define an extent. Display units are specified on the General tab of the Data Frame Properties dialog box. Once you choose an option and click OK, the next time you open the dialog, the Custom Extent option will be automatically selected and will show you the top, left, right, and bottom coordinates of the extent you specified. When you choose an option that is based on an extent that can change, such as the extent of the map, the features in a layer, or the outline of the selected graphics, the dialog gets that current extent and stores its actual coordinates, so that any further changes made in the map or to layers, and so on, that would otherwise change this extent are ignored. In other words, when you are defining an extent using this dialog, the option you choose isn't dynamic—it is just a convenient way to specify an extent to save you having to type in its actual coordinates. Tip: An easy way to specify a custom extent is to zoom to the area you want to use as your new full extent, then use the Current Visible Extent option. 23.3. Quick ways to navigate data frames and layouts Desktop » Mapping » Working with ArcMap You can use keyboard shortcuts and your mouse for quicker navigation with maps and layout pages. For example, you can pan, zoom, or recenter the map without having to go to a toolbar and click a different tool for each operation. You can also download ArcGIS for Desktop: A Selection of Time-Saving Tips and Shortcuts, a printable PDF of tips and shortcuts. Navigating with the mouse Using the mouse wheel makes it easy to zoom and pan anytime you like without changing the tool you are currently using. These shortcuts work in data view and layout view. In layout view, they apply to the page by default. You can hold down the SHIFT key and perform any shortcut to apply it to the data frame instead of the page (the active data frame in the case of rolling the mouse wheel, or the data frame you clicked in the case of clicking or dragging the mouse wheel). Mouse wheel action ArcMap navigation function Rolling wheel back and forth Zooms in and out Holding down CTRL and rolling Zooms in and out but with finer increment; used for small adjustments Clicking mouse wheel (or middle mouse button) Centers map at location where you clicked Holding down mouse wheel (or middle mouse button) and dragging Pans Holding down CTRL and clicking mouse wheel Centers and zooms in at location you clicked Holding down CTRL and dragging with the mouse wheel Zooms in Rolling the mouse wheel is applied to whichever part of the user interface the pointer is currently over. In this way, you can just move the pointer over the map and roll the wheel to zoom in or out, regardless of which window or dialog box has keyboard focus. You can reverse the zoom in/zoom out convention used by the mouse wheel. Click Customize > ArcMap Options to open the ArcMap Options dialog box. Click the Generaltab and make your changes in the Mouse Wheel and Continuous Zoom/Pan Tool section. Note: You can use the middle mouse button on a three-button mouse instead of the mouse wheel for all the shortcuts except for rolling to zoom in and out. Navigation while using other tools Hold down the following keys to temporarily turn the tool you are currently using into a navigation tool: Z—Zoom In X—Zoom Out C—Pan B—Continuous Zoom/Pan (Dragging with left mouse button zooms in/out; dragging with right mouse button pans.) These shortcuts work in Data view and Layout view. In Layout view, they apply to the page by default. Hold down the SHIFT key as well as the key to apply it to the data frame you click in the page. Recentering the map with one click You can quickly recenter the map when you use the pan tools. A click with the Pan tool recenters the data frame at the location you clicked. A click with the Layout Pan tool recenters the page at the location you clicked. The Continuous Zoom/Pan tool The Continuous Zoom/Pan tool can be added to any toolbar in the ArcMap user interface. Click Customize > Customize Mode to open the Customize dialog box. Click the Commands tab and select the Continuous Zoom and Pan tool from the Pan/Zoom category. This tool is especially useful if you want to use dynamic zooming and panning when you do not have a thumbwheel. You can temporarily turn any tool into this tool by holding down the B key on your keyboard. The Continuous Zoom/Pan tool does not have to be added to your ArcMap user interface for this to be available. You can reverse the zoom in/zoom out convention on the General tab of the ArcMap Options dialog box. When this tool is active, you can recenter the map by clicking with the right mouse button in addition to panning the map by dragging with the right mouse button. The Continuous Zoom/Pan tool works on the page when you are in Layout View. Hold down the SHIFT key to operate on a data frame when you are in Layout View. Other navigation shortcuts When the Zoom In tool , Zoom Out tool , or Pan tool is active, F6 toggles among these three tools. F6 also toggles among the corresponding three layout tools when you are in Layout View. The ARROW KEYS scroll the map in the direction you press, unless a graphic or map element is selected, in which case they nudge that element. The HOME and END keys also scroll the map left and right. PAGEUP and PAGEDOWN scroll the map up and down. The + and - keys zoom in and out, the same as the Fixed Zoom In and Fixed Zoom Out tools. The < and > keys go back to the previous extent or forward to the next extent, the same as the Go Back To Previous Extent and Go To Next Extent buttons. The INSERT key takes you to the full extent, like the Full Extent button. Hold down ALT and click the name of a layer in the table of contents to zoom to the extent of that layer. Navigating with context menus Right-clicking the map in Data view gives you a menu containing a set of commonly used commands. The menu includes some commands that operate at the location you right-clicked, enabling you to perform an operation once without changing your current tool. 23.4. Using the Go To XY tool As you work with a map, you can easily change how you view the data it contains. When you're just browsing a map, you might want to pan and zoom around the data to investigate different areas and features. Most of the tools for navigating your data are found on the Tools toolbar. One of the special tools is called Go To XY. You can use this tool to type in x,y coordinates and navigate to them. The coordinates you enter can be Longitude-Latitude Values in the map document's coordinate system U.S. National Grid (USNG) coordinates Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinate notation On the Tools toolbar, click the Go To XY button to open the Go To XY dialog box, which is shown here. You can use the Go To XY dialog box to pan to, zoom to, or flash the location. You can also draw a point, a labeled point, or a callout at the location. The recent history list makes it easy to return to coordinates you have already entered. Tip: You can set the symbols used for markers, labels, and callouts by clicking Drawing on the Draw toolbar and clicking Default Symbol Properties. Tools on the Go To XY dialog box Button Name Function Pan To Pan to the location. Zoom To Zoom to the location. Flash Flash the location. Add Point Draw a point at the location. Add Labeled Point Draw a point at the location labeled with its coordinates. Add Callout Draw a callout pointing at the location showing its coordinates. Recent Return to a location you've already entered in this session. Units Choose the units in which to enter coordinates. Guidelines for specifying coordinates with the Go To XY command You can specify the location as a longitude-latitude coordinate pair, a Military Grid Reference System grid location, a Universal Transverse Mercator coordinate, or a U.S. National Grid location. Click the Units button to choose the units in which to enter coordinates. Remember that x is longitude (East/West), and y is latitude (North/South)—the same order in which coordinates are listed in the status bar. Spherical coordinates aren't always specified in this order, so make sure you enter longitude first in this dialog box. For example, if someone asks you to plot 17.1325, -60.666 on the map, ask them if these coordinates are in longitude-latitude or latitude-longitude order. The only way to tell the order from the coordinates themselves is if they contain E, W, N, S characters to signify the hemisphere. When you are using decimal degrees (DD), degrees minutes seconds (DMS), or degrees decimal minutes (DM), coordinates can be entered by using a minus sign before the numeric value to signify the western or southern quadrants or using E, W, N, S characters before or after the numeric values. Values in DMS and DM coordinates can be separated with spaces or the °, ', " special characters (such as when you paste coordinates that you have copied from other dialog boxes or applications that use those characters) or both. Regardless of whether you are using DD, DMS, or DM in the dialog box, coordinates can be entered in any of these three longitude-latitude formats and are automatically converted to match your chosen format. When you are using DD and DM, coordinates you input are always converted to use a minus sign to signify W or S. When you are using DMS, coordinates you input are always converted to use E, W, N, S to signify quadrants and are given the °, ', ", special characters. When using MGRS, or USNG locations, make sure there are no spaces in the coordinate string. Valid longitude-latitude inputs -45 -45 45 W 45 S 45.50W 45.50S W45 S45 45 30.5W 44 30.5S 45° 30'30"W 45°30'30"N 45 30 30 W 45 30 30 N -45 30 30 45 30 30 45 30.50W 45 30.50 -45.50833 45.50833 Valid MGRS and USNG inputs 18SUH 100,000-meter square 0-digit coordinate 18SUH64 10,000-meter square 2-digit coordinate 18SUH6743 1,000-meter square 4-digit coordinate 18SUH678432 100-meter square 6-digit coordinate 18SUH67894321 10-meter square 8-digit coordinate 18SUH6789043210 1-meter square 10-digit coordinate Valid UTM coordinate notation input 17R 419230 2714967 1-meter square 13-digit coordinate Tip: You can use the Identify tool on the Tools toolbar to click any location in the map and find its x,y location. 23.5. Working with map scales When you draw maps within a data frame, you can display the map at any desired map scale. You can also set up a series of desired map scales that allow you to select a map scale from a list. You can specify the scale of your map by either typing in a value or choosing one from a list. Tip: If the scale box on the Standard toolbar is disabled, the data frame may be set to a fixed extent or fixed scale. To enable the scale box, click View > Data Frame Properties to open the Data Frame Properties dialog box. Click the Data Frame tab and select Automatic from the Extent drop-down menu. Scale entry can be flexible. There are many ways you can enter values into the scale box. You can simply type a number with or without comma separators. You can type a 1: and a number. You can paste values into the box. You can type a relative scale (e.g., 1 cm = 100 m or 1 in = 1 mi). The 1: prefix can be present or absent (e.g., 1,000,000). A hyphen (-) or the word to can be used as the separator in place of a colon (:). Commas used for separating thousands can be present or absent (e.g., 1,000,000 or 1000000). The values in absolute scale expressions can be specified in reverse order (e.g., 5 mi to 1 in). The number one can be given as a number or a word (e.g., One inch = 5 miles) The following unit abbreviations can be used: in, pt, ft, yd, mi, nm, mm, cm, m, km, dd, dm Plurals can be used or not (e.g., mile or miles). You will see two additional options in the Scale drop-down list when you are specifying a scale on a dialog box: <None>: Choose this option to clear the scale so that no scale is used. As a shortcut to choosing <None> from the list, you can type 0, none, or <None>. <Use Current Scale>: If you choose this option, the current scale of the active data frame as it is displayed in the current view will be automatically inserted into the field. This makes it very easy to set the scale to be the same as the current scale you are using. So if you choose this option when the current scale of the data frame in your map is 1:45,678, that value will appear in the scale field. Customizing the map scale list You can customize the standard scales that appear in the map scale list throughout ArcMap, along with the format with which scales are shown. Using <Customize This List...> When you click on Customize This List from the Scale drop-down list, the Scale Settings dialog box appears that allows you to build a series of map scale settings and to use a map scale list prepared by others. You can add and remove map scales by manually typing them or by clicking Add Current to add the current map scale to the list. You can also save your scale settings and share them with other users or load a scale settings file for use on your maps. Changes you make to the list of standard scales on the Standard Scales tab are stored in the active data frame in your map. Each data frame in your map document can have a different list of standard scales. In this way, you can tailor the list of standard scales to the specific map represented by each data frame in your map document. To make your current set of standard scales the default that will be used in all new map documents you create, click the Set As Default button on the Standard Scalestab. To reset your active data frame to use the default of standard scales, click Load > Default Scales. You can limit the map display to the scales listed by checking the Only display these scales when zooming check box. When this box is checked, zooming in using any method that steps progressively through scales will be limited to the scales listed in this dialog. This option applies to rolling the mouse wheel, clicking the Fixed Zoom In and Fixed Zoom Out buttons on the Tools toolbar and pressing the + or – keys on your keyboard. By default it doesn't apply to the interactive Zoom In andZoom Out tools on the Tools toolbar. Tip: To make the interactive Zoom In and Zoom Out tools snap to these scales, hold down CTRL as you use these tools. You can also set how map scales appear using the Scale Format tab on the Scale Settings dialog box. When creating or editing scale formats, you will have different options available depending on whether you are working with an absolute or relative scale format. For an absolute format, you can set the separator to use in the scale ratio. By default, a colon is used. For a relative format, you can set both the page and map units (for example, centimeters on the page equals miles on the ground), specify the equals indicator, and set appearance options such as the number of decimal places to show and whether to capitalize or abbreviate the units. You can also specify whether to Show thousands separators (for example, 24000 has no separators) or to Reverse the order of the scale (for example, 24,000:1). Changes you make on the Scale Format tab are stored at the application level and apply to all your ArcMap sessions. The scale format information is not stored inside your map document. 23.6. Working with data frame reference scales You can set a reference scale for your data frame, which fixes the size for symbols and text to draw at the desired height and width at the referenced map scale. This is like freezing the symbol and text sizes used in your data frame. One reason to set a reference scale is if you want the detail in your data frame to look the same on-screen as when you print it. It's useful to see the map's symbols on- screen at the size they will appear in the printed copy. Let's say you are creating a map for publication that will be printed out at a scale of 1:25,000. If you set the data frame's reference scale to be 1:25,000, the symbols and text sizes in your data frame appear on-screen at the same size in relation to each other that they will have in your printed map. So you'll be able to zoom in on areas where there is a lot of detail and labeling and assess whether you want to adjust symbol sizes or the positioning of text. When a reference scale is set, all feature symbology, labels, and graphics in the current data frame are scaled relative to the reference scale. However, you can disable scaling for individual layers: double-click the layer, click the Display tab, then uncheck Scale symbols when a reference scale is set. Since geodatabase annotation and dimension features have their own reference scales, they are not affected by a data frame reference scale. Setting a reference scale causes your fill symbols to become larger as you zoom in from the reference scale and shrink as you zoom out. It's important to recognize this behavior because it is not typically what interactive map users want in their online, multiscale basemaps. When designing and working with interactive and web maps, it's likely that you will want to disable this reference scale behavior. The two images below show the difference between having a reference scale set and not having it set when you zoom in and out on your map. In the top image, a reference scale is set, and in the bottom image, it isn't. When no reference scale has been set (the default), symbol and text sizes remain the same on your data frame as you zoom in and out. So, for example, the width of the symbols used to show line features appears to be the same on-screen irrespective of what scale you are viewing your data frame at. Setting a data frame reference scale Here are the steps in setting a reference scale: 1. Right-click the data frame in the table of contents and click Properties. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Type a value in the Reference Scale input box or choose a value from the drop-down list. 4. Tip: 5. You can customize the list of scales available in ArcGIS , such as in the Reference Scale list. To learn more, seeWorking with map scales. 6. Click OK. 7. Alternatively, you can use the current map scale. Right-click the data frame in the table of contents, point to Reference Scale, then click Set Reference Scale. From this same menu, you can also choose Clear Reference Scale or Zoom To Reference Scale to return to your printed map view from other map scales. 23.7. Working with magnifier, viewer, and overview windows ArcMap provides three additional map windows to view the spatial data on your map: a Magnifier window, a Viewer window, and an Overview window. When you don't want to adjust your map display but want to see more detail, retain a particular view of an area, or get an overview of an area, open another window. All these windows operate with Data view and not in the Layout view. You can also simultaneously open more than one of these windows. Working with the display windows Opening a window To open a window, click Windows on the main menu and select the type of display window you want to open. Tip: You can also open a Viewer window containing the extent of a box drawn on the map with the Create Viewer Windowtool on the Tools toolbar. The Magnifier Window The Magnifier window works like a magnifying glass: as you pass the window over the data, you see a magnified view of the location under the window. The Magnifier window allows you to see a magnified view of a small area without changing the extent of your data view. You can adjust the magnification by clicking thePercentage drop-down arrow or typing a value. The Viewer Window A Viewer window behaves like an independent view onto the map, and you can use any of the ArcMap interactive tools inside the window. For example, you can zoom and pan to a different part of the map to compare it with what is shown in the main ArcMap window. You can also identify and select features, perform editing, and so on. When you right-click the window, you'll get a menu of useful shortcuts. You can also use the toolbar at the top of the window to navigate your map. The scale for theViewer window can be specified by clicking the Scale drop-down or typing a value. A Viewer window can be used to work with inactive data frames side by side with the active data frame shown in the main ArcMap window. For example: For using multiple views such as those that are created using the ArcGIS Schematics extension For performing analysis and want to compare different results Working with the Magnifier and Viewer windows You can resize and set properties for both the Magnifier and Viewer windows. Click the right-arrow to open a shortcut menu for either window. You can use this menu to switch a map window between a Magnifier window and Viewer window. You can use it to set properties and synchronize the Viewer window's display with the location and spatial extent shown in the main ArcMap window. You can also right-click in the display window to access additional display capabilities from the shortcut menu. If you have dual monitors, you can put a Viewer window showing one data frame onto your second monitor to maximize your display area. Double-click the title bar to maximize the Viewer window. Note that the functionality provided in a Viewer window showing an inactive data frame is restricted. The main limitation is that you can't perform feature or graphic editing in the inactive data frame. When you hover the mouse pointer over a Viewer window showing an inactive data frame with a tool that is not supported, the pointer will change to show you that it is not supported. The Overview window The Overview window uses a box to show the extent of your display view within the total extent of your data. You can use the Overview window to navigate the map in the Data view display. Using the Overview window to pan and zoom your map display The Overview window displays a box showing the current extent of the map in your data frame. You can click and drag this box to pan and zoom your data frame display. To zoom in and out on your map display, click the corners to shrink and expand the extent of the box. Setting other properties You can set options for an Overview window by right-clicking the title bar and clicking Properties. For example, you can choose the extent's fill symbol and the window's background color. In addition, you can choose which layer is shown in the overview window. It's often very useful to use an image or a basemap as your Overview window display layer. By default, the layer at the bottom of the ArcMap table of contents is the one drawn in the Overview window and is used to set the extent of the window. Also, you can access the reference layer's Properties dialog box from the Overview Properties dialog box. 23.8. Using spatial bookmarks A spatial bookmark identifies a particular geographic location that you want to save and reference later. For example, you might create a spatial bookmark that identifies a study area. As you pan and zoom around your map, you can easily return to the study area by accessing the bookmark. You can also use spatial bookmarks to highlight areas on your map you want others to see. You can create a spatial bookmark at any time. As a shortcut, you can create bookmarks when you find and identify map features. Spatial bookmarks are defined for working with spatial data in data view; they can't be defined on an area of the page in layout view. Using spatial bookmarks To go to the location of a bookmark in your map display, click Bookmarks on the main menu and click the bookmark that you want to go to in your map. Note: If your data frame has a fixed scale so that zooming in and out is unavailable, choosing a bookmark from theBookmarks menu pans to that bookmark. Creating a bookmark 1. Pan and zoom the data frame to your area of interest. 2. Click Bookmarks > Create Bookmark. 3. On the Create Bookmark dialog box, enter the name of the new bookmark and click OK. Tip: You can create bookmarks automatically from the selected features or graphics on your map. First, select the features or graphics that you want to create bookmarks from. Click the My Places button on the Data Frame Tools toolbar and use the Add From menu button on the My Places dialog box. Then select the places in the list that you just added if they are not already selected and click Save Selected from the Save menu button. This creates a places file (.dat) that you can load into Bookmarks Manager. When you load places into Bookmarks Manager, they are converted into bookmarks. Creating a bookmark using the Identify tool When you use the Identify tool to click features and display their attributes, you can create a spatial bookmark. Here are the steps: 1. Click the Identify tool and click a feature. 2. On the Identify window, right-click the feature for which you want to create a spatial bookmark and click Create Bookmark. This creates a bookmark with an extent that surrounds the feature and names it after the feature. Creating a bookmark using the Find tool When you use the Find tool and generate a set of matches, you can right-click one of the matches and click Create Bookmark as shown here. The bookmark is named after the feature. Managing and sharing bookmarks Each data frame has its own list of bookmarks, which are stored in the map document. To load bookmarks into another data frame or a different map document, export the bookmarks. Bookmarks are exported to an ArcGIS place file (.dat), which is the same file used with My Places. This allows you to save and load bookmarks into your My Places list and vice versa. Bookmarks Manager allows you to add, remove, rename, navigate to, save, and load spatial bookmarks. You can also organize and reorder your list of bookmarks. To open Bookmarks Manager, click Bookmarks > Manage Bookmarks. To select multiple bookmarks, hold down CTRL or SHIFT and click the bookmarks you want to use. If multiple bookmarks are selected in the list, Zoom To zooms to the extent that envelopes all the selected bookmarks. Zoom To is unavailable if no bookmark is selected or if changing the scale of this data frame has been disabled because the fixed scale option is being used on the Data Frame Properties dialog box's Data Frame tab. If multiple bookmarks are selected in the list, Pan To recenters the map on the center of the area defined by the bookmark(s) without changing the scale of the map.Pan To is unavailable if no bookmark is selected in the list on the left or if changing the extent of this data frame has been disabled because the fixed extent option is being used on the Data Frame Properties dialog box's Data Frame tab. Tip: To zoom to a bookmark, double-click it. To pan to a bookmark, hold down CTRL and double-click it. To sort the bookmarks alphabetically, click the Name field at the top of the list. For more options, right-click a bookmark. For example, to update the extent of a bookmark, right-click it and choose Update Extent in this way you can modify the extent of a bookmark without having to delete it and re-create it. To rename a bookmark, click the bookmark to select it and click again to edit its name. You can also right-click a bookmark and choose the Renamecommand. Saving and loading bookmarks You can save a series of bookmarks that you have created and share them with other users, who can load them into their maps. For example, you might create a set of bookmarks for areas in your city and share them. 23.9. Using My Places The My Places dialog box lets you create and work with a list of your most frequently used or favorite addresses, locations, features, and spatial extents. You can use this dialog box to navigate around to view these places. You can also annotate your map to show their locations and add the places into the route finding dialog boxes as stops and barriers. Adding items to the My Places list makes it easy for you to store your frequently used addresses, gazetteer locations, features, and extents and use them to navigate around maps and globes. Click the My Places button on the Data Frame Tools toolbar to open the My Places dialog box. You can also open the My Places dialog box by right-clicking a location that you find using the Find dialog box or the Geocoding toolbar and clicking Manage My Places. Your list of places is available regardless of which map you are using. Places are stored in a separate file on your computer, not in the map document, as is the case with spatial bookmarks. So you work with the same list of places in any application that supports them. You can add items to the My Places list using the buttons on the My Places dialog box or through the Find dialog box. Right-click an item you find in the Find dialog box or Geocoding toolbar, or any stop or barrier you define in the Find Route dialog box, and click Add To My Places. Select one or more features on the map or globe and click Add From > Selected Feature(s) on the My Places dialog box. Select one or more graphics on the map or globe and click Add From > Selected Graphic(s) on the My Places dialog box. To add a spatial extent to the list, first zoom or pan to the extent you want to add, then click Add From > Current Extent on the My Places dialog box. This option is unavailable if you are working with a globe. Each place is shown with an icon indicating what type of place it is. Double-click a place to flash and pan to it. Right-click to get a menu of options that apply to the currently selected place or places in the list. You can also click a place's name to rename it and click the column headings to sort the list by type or name. You can export places to a file on disk. This allows you to share places with other users, for example, you can send a list of point locations to another user via e-mail. Sending a places file saves you from having to send a shapefile or whole geodatabase if you want to quickly share a location (keep in mind, though, that places are just coordinates with a label, and they don't have other attributes or symbology). Saving and loading your places also makes it easy for you to copy the places onto a different machine or install a common set of places, such as study areas, on a number of machines in a workgroup so that all team members can access them. An ArcGIS Place File (.dat) can be loaded into either the My Places list or as spatial bookmarks. Tip: The My Places tool is available in ArcGlobe. Add the tool to any toolbar by clicking Customize > Customize Mode to open the Customize dialog box. Click the Commands tab and navigate to the Generic category. Drag the My Places tool onto any toolbar. 23.10. Working with the feature cache If you're working with data stored in a geodatabase, creating a feature cache can often speed up common ArcMap tasks. The feature cache allows you to temporarily store the features in the current map display in ArcMap in your local machine's memory. Because retrieving the features from local memory is a fast operation, using the feature cache often results in performance improvements. The feature cache only stores features in geodatabases (and ArcIMS feature services). The feature cache is most useful when you are working within a specific area of a map. For example, if you are working with data in an ArcSDE geodatabase that serves features over a network, features in the current extent must be retrieved from the source database each time your display is updated. Using a feature cache reduces the load on your network and the geodatabase since ArcMap accesses this information from your computer's memory (RAM). Since features are cached on the client, it reduces the number of queries the client needs to execute on the server. Some of the activities that can often benefit from a feature cache include drawing large or complex datasets, labeling, editing, selecting features, retrieving the same features for multiple layers on a map, and drawing features using a definition query. Labeling, for example, can be a slow and costly process, requiring multiple round-trips to the data source as the label engine attempts to place the maximum number of labels on the map. Using the feature cache tools ArcMap has tools to help you build and work with the feature cache. These tools are found on the Feature Cache toolbar. Button Name Function Build Feature Cache Builds a cache of the features in the current map extent Empty Feature Cache Empties the feature cache Toggles Auto- Cache Toggles the automatic creation of the map's feature cache Set Auto- Cache Scale Sets the maximum scale for automatically creating the map cache Clear Auto- Cache Scale Clears the automatic cache maximum scale Show Feature Cache Displays the extent of the feature cache Zoom To Feature Cache Zooms the map to the extent of the feature cache You can create a feature cache by clicking the Build Feature Cache button . You can also use the automatic cache (auto-cache) function to automatically update the feature cache whenever you move outside the currently cached extent. The auto-cache can be useful if you are working in a series of different geographic areas and you don't want to rebuild the cache for each area. It is also convenient when you don't know the exact boundaries of the area you want to cache. Since auto-caching may hinder performance, you should set an auto-cache minimum scale. A feature cache will be created automatically unless the map is zoomed out beyond the minimum scale. For example, suppose you set 1:50,000 as the minimum scale. When the map is zoomed in to 1:14,500, the feature cache will be created automatically, but when the map is zoomed out to 1:75,000, the feature cache will not be rebuilt. For geodatabase data, the advantages of the feature cache are most pronounced when the data source is an ArcSDE geodatabase. In a multiuser environment, consistent use of the feature cache in ArcMap can significantly improve the overall performance of the system by reducing the number of queries to the geodatabase, the number of features retrieved from the geodatabase, and the overall network traffic. Care must be taken, though, when using feature caches to edit in multiuser, nonversioned edit sessions. In addition, there may be a minor performance gain with a feature cache for file or personal geodatabases, such as when editing features with large numbers of vertices or accessing the data over a network. The feature cache is most useful when you are working within a specific map extent. Work that requires frequent panning and zooming across a large area will not usually benefit from a feature cache. Creating a feature cache 1. First, pan and zoom your map to the area where you will be working. 2. On the main menu, click Customize > Toolbars > Feature Cache to add the Feature Cache toolbar. 3. Click the Build Feature Cache button to create a feature cache for the current map extent. Tip: Because the feature cache is stored in your computer's RAM, building a cache for a large area with many features may consume a large amount of memory and can take some time. You can cancel building the map cache by pressing the ESC key. When working with a feature cache while editing, the rules for Stop Editing are that if edits are saved, the feature cache is maintained, and if edits are not saved, the feature cache is cleared. If the edit operation is aborted, whether it is on Stop Editing or within the current edit session, the feature cache is cleared. Viewing the extent of the cached area Click the Show Feature Cache button to view the extent of the current feature cache. The currently cached area will flash on the map. If the Show Feature Cache button is green, you are using the feature cache. Green indicates that you are completely within the cached extent and are using cached data. If the Show Feature Cache button is red, part of your current display extent is outside the cached area. You are no longer using cached data. If the button is unavailable, you are completely outside the cached area. You are no longer using cached data. Tip: If any part of your current display extent is outside the cached area, you are no longer using the data cached on your computer. To use the feature cache again, you'll need to build a new cache, use auto-cache, or return to the cached extent. Working with an auto-cache Feature caches are used with very large feature classes containing hundreds of thousands of features. However, to maximize their effectiveness, it's important to set the cache areas for your map. If you have multiple work areas and are working with a large feature class, you can use an auto-cache to ensure efficient performance. Turning on auto-cache enables you to work with a number of areas in your map and automatically cache the features in each of these working areas. A key step is to set a minimum map scale. Automatic feature caching will be turned off when you zoom out past this map scale. This allows you to navigate and move between various work areas on your map. When you zoom out beyond the minimum map scale, auto-caching will be turned off. Feature caching will automatically be turned on again once you zoom in beyond the minimum map scale. Steps 1. On the Feature Cache toolbar, click the Toggles Auto-Cache button to turn it on. 2. Next, set the minimum auto-cache scale. This is the map scale where the auto-cache will automatically turn off if you zoom out beyond it. To do this, zoom your map to the desired auto- cache scale. In most cases, you can set the map extent for one of your typical working areas. Then, click the Set Auto-Cache Scale button . Tip: You can also set auto-cache properties on the Data Frame Properties dialog box on the Feature Cache tab. 24. Improving map drawing performance 24.1. Tips on improving map display performance ArcMap includes a series of tools that enable you to optimize and tune your ArcMap documents for fast display performance. As an ArcMap user, it's always important to explore ways to increase the display performance of your interactive map documents—especially for maps that you plan to share with other users. Using the Analyze Map tool to analyze and improve display performance The Analyze Map tool helps you to improve the drawing performance of your ArcMap documents by generating a list of potential display performance issues. Each problem description guides you to suggested updates that you can make to your map layer to address the issue and improve map-drawing performance. Using basemap layers to precompute your map display You can include basemap layers in your maps to improve display performance. Basemap layers are only computed once—the initial time you visit an extent at a map scale. These tiled views are used in subsequent map displays as you pan, zoom, and navigate your map. Because these views are precomputed, map display is optimized. You can overlay or mash up your other operational layers (the layers that draw on demand) on top of the basemap. Basemap layers are flexible and easy to manage. They manage themselves automatically so little work is required to define them in your map documents. Essentially, you can add and remove the layers in your basemap layer as needed. Leveraging caching in ArcGIS ArcGIS for Desktop uses a series of caching strategies to reduce the number of round trips to retrieve data, to precompute some GIS results, and to reuse map displays during a session. There are a number of strategies that can be used. 24.2. About ArcGIS caches ArcGIS software refers to caches in a number of ways, and you will encounter a reference to more than one of these as you use ArcGIS. This can be confusing to understand. Which cache is which? Which is the right one for you to use, and when should you consider using each? This topic helps to explain three of the common cache types and will point you to topics for further reading and information. The ArcMap feature cache This feature cache is used to improve performance for multiple users who access and work with ArcMap documents and data across a local area network (LAN) in their organization. The goal of the feature cache is to temporarily store features and attribute records in memory on your computer for an ArcMap session. The ArcMap feature cache works well when you are focused on work tasks performed within a particular map extent. Note: At earlier releases of ArcGIS, the feature cache was referred to as the edit cache and later as the map cache. Cached map services delivered using ArcGIS for Server A cached map service is a collection of prerendered map tiles that can be used for display of a map service. This allows a map service to quickly display maps because the map image does not have to be rendered on the fly. Each map image is computed only once when the map cache is created. This means that each time the user requests a map from ArcGIS for Server, the map tiles are retrieved from the map cache for the requested map extent and resolution. A cached map service can support multiscale maps. It does this by creating a multiscale image map for your map at a specified series of map scales. You choose the map scales at which your feature cache will be computed—say at map scales of 1:250,000, 1:100,000, 1:60,000, 1:30,000, 1:10,000, and 1:5,000. Frequently, users will choose to use a standard cache tiling scheme such as the Web Mercator cache schema used in Google Maps, Bing Maps, and at ArcGIS Online. Some cached map services use on-the-fly caching. In these cases, not all map tiles are precomputed. If the requested map tiles do not exist, the map image will be computed automatically. The use of cached map services means that ArcGIS map services can scale to very large numbers of users and maps served per hour. For example, ArcGIS Onlineserves millions of maps a day with ArcGIS for Server using a surprisingly small deployment of GIS servers. The display cache The display cache is a local disk cache on your computer that stores data for basemap layers, tiled images from cached map services from ArcGIS for Server, tiled images from other Internet map services, and the ArcGIS Globe cache. ArcGIS for Desktop uses this display cache to help manage and improve display performance in ArcMap and ArcGlobe. 24.3. Managing your local display cache The display cache is a local disk cache on your computer that stores data for basemap layers, tiled images from cached map services from ArcGIS for Server, tiled images from other Internet map services, and the ArcGIS globe cache. ArcGIS for Desktop uses this display cache to help manage and improve display performance in ArcMap and ArcGlobe. The trade-off is that you often have to plan how to manage the contents in your local cache. Over time, the contents in your local cache can become out of date with the server contents. In addition, the local display cache can consume significant disk space on your local computer. You'll need to devise a strategy to manage how your local cache is managed, either layer by layer or for all the contents in your display cache. The steps for each are described here. Managing the entire display cache You can use the ArcMap Options dialog box to view the current display cache size, clear the display cache for all map layers, and set the path for the local cache storage. Click Customize > ArcMap Options on the main menu and then click the Display Cache tab on the ArcMap Options dialog box. When you click the Display Cache tab, you might notice that the cache size counter is spinning up— summing the total display cache size on your local disk. Managing the display cache for each layer The display cache for individual layers can be managed for the following: Tiled images from cached map services from ArcGIS for Server Tiled images from other Internet map services You manage the display cache on the Cache tab on the Layer Properties dialog box for these layer types. Right-click the layer name in the table of contents, click Properties, then click the Cache tab. The three primary tasks you can perform on the Cache tab are described here. Choose the caching option Select the desired option to manage the cache for this layer. Keep the cache between sessions—This is the default setting and offers the best performance. It's recommended for services that are not likely to change. Clear cache when the session ends—This is recommended for services that change periodically. Don't cache any data locally—The map images are written to memory. This ensures presentation of the most up-to-date data available from the service, but it can be slower. This is often useful if you're short on local disk space or the data is dynamic. Note: In some cases, the ArcGIS for Server administrator will choose to disable the use of local map caches for a specific map service. In situations where you access such a map service, the Don't cache any data locally choice is toggled on, and you are unable to change this setting. Clear the local cache This clears the local display cache for the selected layer, but no other layers in the cache. Clearing the cache for a service affects all the layers in all your maps that reference this service: local caches are stored on a service-by-service basis, and if you have multiple layers that reference a cached map service, they all utilize the same cache of tiles in your Windows temporary folder. The local cache on your machine is always stored in a folder called MapCacheV1, and like all temporary data, this folder is stored under your Windows temporary folder. Inside the MapCacheV1 folder, a separate subfolder is maintained for each cached map service, and this is the last part of the path you see. Tip: Caches being used by basemap layers cannot be cleared while in use. To clear the cache, remove the basemap layers from the map. If you normally draw maps for only a few areas, such as your agency's local study area, the cache won't become really large, because the tiles you draw will likely already be in your cache. If you draw maps for many different areas, your cache can grow. Whenever you draw a new area, new tiles are stored in the local cache. View information on the layer's cache size and storage location The dialog box shows the display cache size of the current layer and the path of the cache location on disk. This helps you monitor its use.. 25. Sharing data through packaging 25.1. About packaging In ArcGIS, a package is a compressed file containing GIS data. You share a package like any other file—via e-mail, FTP, the cloud, thumb drives, and so on. You share them between colleagues in a work group, between departments in an organization, or with any other ArcGIS users via ArcGIS Online. The recipient of your package unpacks it—typically by dragging and dropping it onto ArcMap— and immediately begins using its contents. Currently, there are five kinds of packages you can make with ArcGIS: 1. A layer package (.lpk) includes both the layer properties and the dataset referenced by the layer. With a layer package, you can save and share everything about the layer—its symbolization, labeling, table properties, and the data. 2. A map package (.mpk) contains a map document (.mxd); all the data referenced by the layers it contains; and other map items such as graphics, layouts, and so on. Essentially, it's a collection of layer packages along with the map document. 3. A locator package (.gcpk) contains one address locator or a composite locator along with its participating locators. 4. A tile package (.tpk) contains a tile cache of data that you can display as a basemap with ArcGIS Runtime applications. 5. A geoprocessing package (.gpk) is how you share your geoprocessing workflows. 25.2. Creating a layer package Saving a layer package A layer can be saved with its data as a layer package (.lpk). A layer package includes both the layer properties and the dataset referenced by the layer. With a layer package, you can save and share everything about the layer—its symbolization, labeling, field properties, and the data. Other users will be able to add layer packages directly into their maps without having to know how to access the database or classify the data. Layer packages can be created in ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene and can be shared between these applications, including ArcGIS Explorer. When using ArcGlobe or ArcScene, 3D properties can be added to a map layer and included in a layer package. While a layer package will be larger in size than a layer file (because it includes the data), your users will not need to worry about access to your same data sources. Packaging unsupported layers and datasets for previous versions will result in those items not opening when used by previous versions of the software. You will receive a warning for content that will not be available in previous versions of ArcGIS when packaging your layer. Layer packages support multiple versions of ArcGIS; therefore, consider the layers and data sources you are choosing to package to ensure they are available in previous versions of the software. Additionally, a layer can be saved as a schema-only layer package. This type of package allows you to share your layer design and the corresponding data model design without sharing your data. When you unpack a schema-only layer package you will be prompted to create a new geodatabase or pick an existing one, and the data model for the layers will be loaded into that geodatabase. You can then load your own datasets for the layers in that geodatabase. Tip: For a finer degree of control over how data is packaged, you can use the Package Result geoprocessing tool. For example, you can specify that only data within the current map extent is packaged or that enterprise database data is to be extracted for inclusion in the package. 25.3. Creating a map package Map packages (.mpk) make it easy to share complete map documents with others. A map package contains a map document (.mxd) and the data referenced by the layers it contains, packaged into one convenient, portable file. Map packages can be used for easy sharing of maps between colleagues in a work group, across departments in an organization, or with any other ArcGIS users via ArcGIS Online. Map packages have other uses, too, such as the ability to create an archive of a particular map that contains a snapshot of the current state of the data used in the map. If you have enterprise (ArcSDE) geodatabase data in your map you may want to consider checking the Include Enterprise Geodatabase data instead of referencing the dataoption. If you check this option the data is extracted from the enterprise geodatabase into a File Geodatabase by intersecting the features from the layer with the current data frames extent. Not checking this option means that map layers will continue to reference enterprise geodatabase data. For example, when sharing your content within your organization it is likely that enterprise geodatabase data will be accessible for those consuming the package. In this case un-checking this option (i.e. referencing) is a good choice. However, when sharing your content outside of your organization, enterprise geodatabase data will not be accessible and checking this option to include the data in your package is a better choice. Tip: Before packaging a map, be sure to enter descriptive information about it in the Map Document Properties dialog box. This information is built into the package and is accessible to others when you upload your map package into ArcGIS Online. You can access this dialog box by clicking File > Map Document Properties on the main menu. Tip: For a finer degree of control over how data is packaged, you can use the Package_Map geoprocessing tool. For example, you can specify that only data within the current map extent is packaged or that enterprise database data is to be extracted for inclusion in the package. Caution: Map Packages are supported from ArcGIS for Desktop version 10.0 onwards. Map packages will fail to open with older versions (9.3.1 or older). Steps 1. Click File > Share As > Map Package on the main menu. The Map Package dialog box appears: 2. Name your new map package. 3. Specify where to save your map package - either as a file on disk or in your ArcGIS Online account. 4. Specify Additional Files you want to include in the map package. This option allows you to include other content such as detailed documentation, reports, graphs, etc. The following types of files are not allowed to be included in the package - .js, .vbs, .py, .pyc, .pyo, .bat and .ocx. Also, only signed .dlls and .exes are allowed to be included. 5. Fill in the required fields for Item Description. 6. Click Analyze to validate your map for any errors or issues. You must validate and resolve all errors before you can save it to disk or share it to ArcGIS Online. If any issues are discovered, a Prepare window will appear with a list of issues. Right-click on each Prepare message to get more information, read help for the error, and to click on suggested fixes. When you run Analyze on a layer to create a layer package, your layer will be validated for any errors and warnings. If any are found, they will appear in this dialog box. 7. Once validated, click Share to create your map package. 25.4. Creating a tile package About tile packages A tile package allows you to create a set of tiles (images) from a map, then use the set of tiles as a basemap in ArcGIS applications. The tiles are wrapped into a single file, a .tpk file, so you can share the file as you would any file. You can email it, copy it to a network locale, upload it to ArcGIS Online, and so on. You can also use the file to provision devices and applications that run offline (applications that can run disconnected from ArcGIS Server or ArcGIS Online), such as applications built with ArcGIS Runtime SDK for Java, iOS, Windows Mobile, and WPF. The set of tiles is known as a tile cache. Basemaps made of pre-made tiles this way typically display more quickly than other basemaps. Although it will take you time to create the tile package, the cost is a one-time cost. Users of the resulting basemap will not have to wait for the images to be created. The more users you have, the higher the benefit of that one-time cost. However, if the data you need to show on your basemap must be live, with no time delay acceptable, then tile packaging is not appropriate. Because a tile package represents a snapshot of your map at one point in time, the package works best with maps that do not change frequently, such as street maps, imagery, and terrain maps. If some delay between tile package updates is acceptable, to determine whether tile packages will suit your needs, consider the size of the tile package and how widespread the changes for each update would be. A large tile package takes more time to create. It may be practical to update your large tile package only if you can isolate the changed areas and update those areas only. If the tile package is small, you may be able to quickly rebuild the entire package each update. If the update cannot keep up with the changes in an acceptable amount of time, the map is not appropriate for tile packaging. For additional advantages of using tile packages, see Why should I create tile packages? Before you create a tile package, consider the following: Scales and scale dependencies—For details, see the "Tiling scheme" section below and Choosing scales and setting scale dependencies. Layer control—For details, see Planning layer visibility. If you're overlaying caches: Boundaries— For details, see the "Tiling scheme" section below. Coordinate systems—For details, see Choosing a coordinate system. Tile package options Upload package to my ArcGIS Online account —Use this option to share a package with a wide audience by sharing to your ArcGIS Online account. Once you have uploaded the package to your online account, you can share it within your private groups or with everyone. Save package to file—Packages can be shared locally by writing a package file to disk. Like any other file format, a package can be shared through email or by copying and pasting to other locations on your internal network. The following image illustrates saving a tile package to a local directory. Tiling scheme The tiling scheme includes the scale levels, tile dimensions, and tile origin for the cache. These properties define where tile boundaries will exist and are important to match when overlaying caches in some clients. Other properties such as image format are also written into the tiling scheme but do not affect whether the client application can successfully overlay the tiles. There are several options you can choose for the tiling scheme: ArcGIS Online / Bing Maps / Google Maps The ArcGIS Online/Bing Maps/Google Maps tiling scheme allows you to overlay your cache tiles with tiles from these online mapping services. ArcGIS for Desktopincludes this tiling scheme as a built-in option when loading a tiling scheme. When you choose this tiling scheme, the data frame of your source map document must use the WGS 1984 Web Mercator (Auxiliary Sphere) projected coordinate system. The ArcGIS Online/Bing Maps/Google Maps tiling scheme is required if you'll be overlaying your package with ArcGIS Online, Bing Maps, or Google Maps. One advantage of the ArcGIS Online/Bing Maps/Google Maps tiling scheme is that it is widely known in the web mapping world, so your tiles will match those of other organizations who have used this tiling scheme. Even if you don't plan to overlay any of these well-known map services, you may choose the tiling scheme for its interoperability potential. The ArcGIS Online/Bing Maps/Google Maps tiling scheme may contain scales that would be zoomed in too far to be of use to your map. Packaging for large scales can take up much time and disk storage space. For example, the largest scale in the tiling scheme is about 1:1,000. Packaging the entire continental United States at this scale can take weeks and require hundreds of gigabytes of storage. If you aren't prepared to package at this scale level, you should remove this scale level when you create the tile package. An existing map service Choose this option if your organization has created a tiling scheme for an existing service on your GIS server and you want to match it. Matching tiling schemes ensures that your tiles will overlay correctly in your application. If you choose this option, your source map document should use the same coordinate system as the map whose tiling scheme you are importing. A tiling scheme file All tile packages have a tiling scheme file conf.xml in the package directory (example: C:\Documents and Settings\username\My Documents\ArcGIS\packages\MyDataFrame\Layers\conf.xml). You can browse to this file to set the tiling scheme for your map service. This option allows you to use a tiling scheme file you obtained through e-mail, a file share, or an ArcGIS for Server service. Create a custom tiling scheme Choosing a tiling scheme from an online mapping service is not always possible due to requirements that you use a different coordinate system or set of scale levels. In this scenario, you will need to create your own tiling scheme. The following sections in this document will help you choose appropriate scales and other properties for your tiling scheme. Legacy: ArcGIS Online previously used a tiling scheme based on the WGS 1984 geographic coordinate system that used 512 x 512 pixel tiles. If you have services running that need to use this tiling scheme, you must load it from an existing service or a tiling scheme file. Tile format This setting determines what output image format the map service will use when it creates the tiles. Your choice of image format is important, because it determines the size on disk of the tiles, the image quality, and the ability to make the tile background transparent. The default image format is PNG 8, but you may often need to change this based on the type of map you are creating. Below is a summary of the available image formats and their appropriate uses. PNG8—Use PNG 8 for overlay services that need to have a transparent background, such as roads and boundaries. PNG 8 creates tiles of very small size on disk with no loss of information. Do not use PNG 8 if your map contains more than 256 colors. Imagery, hillshades, gradient fills, transparency, and antialiasing can easily push your map over 256 colors. Even symbols such as highway shields may have subtle antialiasing around the edges that unexpectedly adds colors to your map. PNG24—You can use PNG 24 for overlay services, such as roads and boundaries, that have more than 256 colors (if fewer than 256 colors, use PNG 8). PNG32—Use PNG 32 for overlay services, such as roads and boundaries, that have more than 256 colors. PNG 32 is an especially good choice for overlay services that have antialiasing enabled on lines or text. PNG 32 creates larger tiles on disk than PNG 24, but the tiles are fully supported in all browsers. JPEG—Use this format for basemap services that have large color variation and do not need to have a transparent background. For example, raster imagery and very detailed vector basemaps tend to work well with JPEG. JPEG is a lossy image format. It attempts to selectively remove data without affecting the appearance of the image. This can cause very small tile sizes on disk, but if your map contains vector linework or labels, it may produce too much noise or blurry area around the lines. If this is the case, you can attempt to raise the compression value from the default of 75. A higher value, such as 90, may balance an acceptable quality of linework with the small tile size benefit of the JPEG. It's up to you to decide what image quality you consider acceptable. If you are willing to accept a minor amount of noise in the images, you may save large amounts of disk space by choosing JPEG. The smaller tile size also means the application can download the tiles faster. Mixed—A Mixed package uses JPEG in the center of the package with PNG 32 on the edge of the package. Use the mixed mode when you want to cleanly overlay raster packages on other layers. When a mixed package is created, PNG 32 tiles are created anywhere that transparency is detected (in other words, anywhere that the data frame background is visible). The rest of the tiles are built using JPEG. This keeps the average file size down while providing you with a clean overlay on top of other packages. If you do not use the mixed mode package in this scenario, you will see a nontransparent "collar" around the periphery of your image where it overlaps the other package. Before committing to an image format for a large package, build a small package of a representative area of your map and examine the tile quality and performance in a test application. If you'll be working with multiple packages, build a small test package for each and add them to a test application to make sure they overlay as expected. This will allow you to make adjustments before you create the entire package. Levels of detail Select the highest level of detail that you wish to generate your tiles to. The display will indicate the scale of data that you should expect to see at the selected level of detail. Each increase in the level of detail increases the time to create the tile package and the size of the tile package. Entering information about the package The Item Description allows you to provide details about the package to users. The Item Description dialog box provides the following fields where you can enter information describing the package. This includes Summary - Contains brief information about your package. This is a required field. Tags - Tags make it easier to find this package when you or someone else searches for it. Separate tags with a single comma(,). This is a required field. Description - Can contain more detailed information about your package. Access and Use Constraints - Any limitations regarding use, data or distribution. Credits - Acknowledgment indicating who contributed to the package. Note: Any changes you make to item descriptions pre-populated from the Map Document Properties..., will not be reflected in the map document properties. The changes you make will only be for the package itself. Note: Before packaging a map, be sure to enter descriptive information about it in the Map Document Properties dialog box. This information is built into the package and is accessible to others when you upload your map package into ArcGIS Online. You can access this dialog box by clicking File > Map Document Properties on the main menu. For more information on setting Map Document Properties to pre-populate the Item Description seeSetting_map_document_properties Below is an example of the Item Description dialog. Note: Tile packages are supported from ArcGIS 10.1 for Desktop onwards. Tile package will fail to open with older ArcGIS for Desktop versions (10 or older). Fundamentals for creating tile packages Using tile packages can make your maps run faster. When you create a tile package, the application can draw the entire map at several different scales and can store copies of the map images. The application can then distribute these images whenever someone asks for a map. It's much quicker for the application to hand out a cached image than to draw the map each time someone requests it. Another benefit of tile packaging is that the amount of detail in the image doesn't noticeably affect how quickly the server can distribute the copy. Why should I create tile packages? With tile packaging, the only time you pay the performance penalty for drawing the map is when you create the package. For this reason, creating the package might take a long time. However, the benefits of packaging make up for the time it takes to create the package. These are some of the main benefits of tile packaging: Performance: When you deploy tile packages, your users can get more done because they spend less time waiting for the map to draw. Quality: With tile packaging, performance isn't affected by how much detail is in the map. It doesn't matter whether or not you used shaded relief, transparency, or the Maplex labeling engine to create your package. A tile package is just a collection of images, and the application can return one cached image in more or less the same amount of time it can return any other cached image. Industry standard: Have you ever gone to a popular Internet mapping site and watched as the little square tiles fill in as you pan and zoom? Often, it takes just a fraction of a second for all the tiles to appear. That's because they're using caching. With tile packaging, you can achieve similar performance for your maps. What happens during the caching process? Tile packaging does not happen automatically. To make a tile package, you first need to design the map and share it as a tile package. Then, you'll set some cache properties and begin creating tiles. When you create a tile package, you draw it at more than one scale so that users can zoom in and out of the map. When choosing properties for your package, you'll need to determine what scales you want to use for caching. If you're just trying out the tile format for the first time, you can let the computer pick some scales for you. However, you should usually pick your scales earlier so that you can design your map to look good at those scales. Write down the scales and use them as you do your cartographic design in ArcMap. When it's time to create the package, you can enter the scales into the scales section. There are other properties that are important to understand when you create the cache. You can find out more by reading About tile packages. The scales that you pick and the properties you set for the cache are the tiling scheme. Each package has a tiling scheme file that you can import when you create new caches so that all your caches use the same tile sizes and scales. This can help the performance of applications that contain more than one tiled package or cached services. Optionally, you can choose to use the well- known tiling scheme of ArcGIS Online, Google Maps, and Bing Maps so that you can easily overlay your caches with these online mapping services. Can I cache all my maps? A tile package represents a snapshot of your map at one point in time. Because of this, caches work best with maps that do not change frequently. These include street maps, imagery, and terrain maps. If your data tends to change, you will want to recreate your tile packages to update the data. To understand whether your frequently changing map can still be cached, it helps to ask these questions: How up-to-date does my map need to be? If the data you see on the map needs to be live, with no time delay acceptable, then tile packaging is not appropriate. However, if a short delay is acceptable and the tile packaging can be performed within that time window, you can still use tile packaging. How big is my tile package and how widespread are the changes to my data? These two questions go together. A large tile package takes more time to create. It may only be practical to update your large tile package if you can isolate the changed areas and update those only. If the tile package is small, you may be able to quickly rebuild the entire package. If the update cannot keep up with the changes in an acceptable amount of time, the map is not appropriate for tile packaging. After considering the questions above, use tile packaging whenever it's appropriate. The performance benefit that you gain is probably worth the investment it takes to create and update the package. Can I still get to the underlying data? Although map caches represent pictures of the data, you can still allow others to perform identify, search, and query operations on your map service. These tools can get the geographic locations of features from the application and return the results. The application will draw the results in its native graphics layer format on top of the image. How to create a tile package Before packaging a map, be sure to enter descriptive information about it in the Map Document Properties dialog box. This information is built into the package and is accessible to others when you upload your tile package into ArcGIS online. You can access this dialog box by clicking File > Map Document Properties on the main menu. 1. Open ArcMap and open a map you want to create a tile package of. 2. Click Customize > ArcMap Options... on the main menu. The ArcMap Options dialog box appears. 3. Click the Sharing tab. 4. Under the Packaging section, check on Enable ArcGIS Runtime Tools. 5. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box. 6. Click File > Share As > Tile Package... on the main menu. The Tile Package dialog box appears: 7. Specify where to save your tile package, either in your ArcGIS Online account or as a file on disk Check Upload package to my ArcGIS Online account to save the tile package into your ArcGIS Online account and share with other ArcGIS users. Check Save package to file to save the tile package file in a folder. Enter the path and name of the tile package or click the Browse button and navigate to the folder where you want to save the tile package. 8. Click the Tile Format tab and fill in your required tile format details. 9. Click the Item Description tab and fill in all the required fields. 10. Click Analyze to validate your map for any errors or issues. You must validate and resolve all errors before you can save it to disk or share it to ArcGIS Online. If any issues are discovered, a Prepare window will appear with a list of issues. Right-click on each Prepare message to get more information, read help for the error, and to click on suggested fixes. When you run Analyze on a layer to create a layer package, your layer will be validated for any errors and warnings. If any are found, they will appear in this dialog box. 11. Once validated, click Share to create your tile package. Tips for creating tile packages Before you build a tile package, it's important to think about the tiling scheme you will use and the resources that will be needed to build the package cache. You may also need to do extra design work on your map document to make sure that it is usable at each scale level in your tiling scheme. Creating a large cache can take significant time and resources, so you want to make sure you'll be getting what you expect before you start the cache generation. If possible, run a test build of the cache on a smaller map area, or create just the first few levels of the cache to make sure that your images appear as you expect. Designing maps that will be cached When you create a paper map, it's visible at one scale only. Insets that show detailed areas of the map may use one or two additional scales. Fine-tuning your map for accurate generalization, symbology, and labeling can be a challenge even with this small number of scales. When you package a map that will be cached and viewed on a computer screen, you have the added responsibility of making sure the map is readable and useful at all cached scales. Starting with a template The ArcGIS Resource Center contains downloadable examples of multiscale maps. These "map templates" include a sample map document and dataset, which you can modify to fit your own data and design needs. At time of publishing, there are templates available for streets, topography, government infrastructure, trails, historical events, and reference overlays (to be viewed over imagery), with more templates on the way. Even if you don't plan to use the templates, just downloading a few and examining the organization of the map table of contents and datasets can help you learn how to build a successful multiscale map. The remainder of this help topic delves into the design principles for cached maps, which you can see applied in the templates. Choosing scales and setting scale dependencies You can ensure that your map is well designed by applying scale dependencies to labels and features. Examine the example cached images below. As you zoom in on the map, notice how the words and symbols change to convey more information. Road lines become thicker, and cities are represented by polygons instead of points. Similarly, the map switches to more detailed datasets, as the datasets used when zoomed out are too coarse to be useful at closer zoom levels. Streets and their labels only appear at the closest scales, since they would otherwise clutter the map. These scale-dependent changes help the map convey more information in an organized manner. You can configure any features or labels on your map to only be visible at certain scales or to draw in different ways depending on the scale. The scale dependencies you set for your map layers and the scale levels you choose for your tiling scheme should be carefully coordinated. Any features to which you apply a scale dependency are useless unless your tiling scheme includes a scale level at which they are visible. For example, if you have used scale ranges to reveal certain features when the user zooms in beyond 1:2,000, you do not want your tile package cache's closest scale to be 1:2,500, or the user will never see the features. Adding a 1:1,250 scale to the tiling scheme would ensure that users could see the features. If you didn't want to add the extra scale, you could change the scale range so the features appeared when zoomed in beyond 1:3,000. If you are responsible for pacakging a map that you cannot change, you can still design the tiling scheme to take advantage of the map's characteristics. If possible, open the map in ArcMap and examine the layer properties to determine if there are any scale-dependent layers and at which scales they turn on and off. If a layer does have a scale dependency, consider including a scale level in your tiling scheme at which the layer is visible. For example, if a layer is set to be visible between the scales 1:150,000 and 1:250,000, you can include 1:200,000 as a scale in your tiling scheme to ensure the layer appears in your cache. Choosing a coordinate system The data frame that you cache can use any coordinate system. However, if you will be overlaying your tile package with another tile package, you should use the same coordinate system for both. This also applies if you are overlaying your package with tiles from an online mapping service. ArcGIS Online services, Google Maps, and Microsoft Bing Maps all use the WGS 1984 Web Mercator (Auxiliary Sphere) projected coordinate system. Legacy: Prior to ArcGIS 10, ArcGIS Online services used the WGS 1984 geographic coordinate system. These services are not being updated, and any new pacakages that you build to overlay ArcGIS Online services should use WGS 1984 Web Mercator (Auxiliary Sphere). Planning layer visibility Packaging combines all the layers in your tile package into one image. Consequently, you can't turn layers on and off in the final package. This behavior makes your cache fast. It's quicker for the server to get one image than to get many images. So how do you keep the ability to turn layers on and off? One solution is to group related sets of layers in your map, then put each group in its own map document. Create a tile package from each map document. For example, suppose you have a map document with these layers: Banks, Restaurants, Museums, Libraries, Shopping centers, Parcels, Roads, Rivers, County boundaries, Lakes, Parks, and Elevation. If you're just using ArcMap to view the document, you can turn these layers on and off at will. However, if you are going to package this map using a tile package, you'll want to combine some of the layers. Examining the layer list, you might come up with these three logical groupings from which you could make separate map documents: Map document 1 (Points of interest) Banks Restaurants Museums Libraries Shopping centers Map document 2 (Cultural landscape) Parcels Roads Parks County boundaries Map document 3 (Physical features) Rivers Lakes Elevation For each map document, you can create a tile package. Be sure to use the same tiling scheme for each package. Then you can overlay the three map services. If you feel that there may be no need to view physical features separate from the cultural landscape, you could safely combine map documents 2 and 3 into one map document, thereby improving performance even more. Anticipating cache creation time When you create a tile package, applications such as those built with ArcGIS Runtime for WPF and Java must draw map images that cover the full extent of the area you designated for the cache at each scale level you indicated. Additionally, it must create the files and folder structure necessary to contain the cache. The time needed to create the tile package also depends on the scale levels you have chosen, the amount of computer resources you have dedicated to building the tile package, and the density of information in the map. Even using a powerful machine, a large package can sometimes take days to generate. In many cases, the performance benefit gained from using the tile package still outweighs the long time necessary to create the tile package. Choice of scale levels When choosing the scale levels for your tile package, remember that the closer you zoom in to the map, the more tiles are required to cover the map extent and the longer it will take your package to generate. Every time you halve the scale's denominator, it takes four times as many tiles to cover a square area of the map. For example, a square map at 1:500 scale contains four times more tiles than a map at 1:1,000 scale, and a square map at 1:250 contains 16 times more tiles than a map at 1:1,000 scale. To get an idea of how quickly the number of tiles in a tile package can increase, open your map in ArcMap. Zoom out so that you can see an area of the map in a space about 256 pixels wide by 256 pixels high. (This area will vary depending on your display settings. Chances are it's 2.5–3.25 inches [6.35–8.26 centimeters] on a side.) At this scale, it would take one cache tile at default settings to cover the area. Now halve the denominator of the current scale. (For example, if you were originally viewing the map at 1:40,000 scale, zoom in to 1:20,000.) At this scale, it would take four tiles to cover the same area. Halve the denominator again, and it would take 16 tiles to cover the area. This table shows how the number of tiles needed to cover the original square area would increase with each halving of the denominator. The first scale of 1:32,000,000 can cover an area approximately the size of the western United States in one 256 by 256 pixel tile. Level Scale Number of tiles 1st level 1:32,000,000 1 tile 2nd level 1:16,000,000 4 tiles 3rd level 1:8,000,000 16 tiles 4th level 1:4,000,000 64 tiles 5th level 1:2,000,000 256 tiles 6th level 1:1,000,000 1,024 tiles 7th level 1:500,000 4,096 tiles 8th level 1:250,000 16,384 tiles 9th level 1:125,000 65,536 tiles 10th level 1:62,500 262,144 tiles 11th level 1:31,250 1,048,576 tiles Density of information in the map The tile package size and time needed to create the package are both affected by the density of information within the map. Areas of the map with many changing colors and patterns will yield larger-sized cache tiles than more homogenous areas. For example, maps with high-resolution raster images will probably cause large tile sizes, not because of the original image size on disk, but because of the variation in color and pattern between the image pixels. Similarly, maps that contain many layers and take relatively long amounts of time to draw in ArcMap will typically require more time for creating a package. This is because the appropriate layers of the map are repeatedly drawn as it creates the tiles for each scale level. 25.5 About creating Runtime content You can consolidate the features, tabular data, basemaps, network datasets, and locators from your map into a folder and prepare it for use in applications built with ArcGIS Runtime SDKs. This folder can then be provisioned to devices to use with applications that run offline (applications that can run disconnected from ArcGIS Server or ArcGIS Online). For more information on building applications with ArcGIS Runtime SDKs, see the developers site. Data from feature services and map services cannot be used. For more information on using services in your ArcGIS Runtime SDKs, see Services pattern. Before you can create Runtime content, the Share As menu item must be enabled in ArcMap Options. To enable the Share As Runtime content menu item 1. Open ArcMap. 2. In the ArcMap main menu, click Customize > ArcMap Options. 3. In the ArcMap Options dialog box, click Sharing. 4. Check the Enable ArcGIS Runtime Tools check box and click OK. To create Runtime content 1. Open ArcMap. 2. Open or create a map document with the desired data. 3. In the ArcMap main menu, click File > Share As > Runtime content. In the left pane of the dialog box that appears, you can access settings (options) for consolidating your data. For more information, see the option descriptions that follow. 4. When you're finished specifying settings, click Share. 5. ArcMap outputs your package to the folder you specified in the Output folder setting. Option descriptions Output folder Runtime content is saved locally into the folder you specify here. This folder can be deployed to your devices to use with your ArcGIS Runtime-based applications. Feature and Tabular Data You can use feature and tabular data from the current map as operational layers in your Runtime applications. These layers can be used to view and query the data contained in them. Note: When layers are consolidated, they will all be reprojected to the spatial reference of the map's data frame or to the spatial reference of the basemap's tiling scheme, if a basemap is included. For feature and tabular data to be included in the Runtime content, there are a few restrictions to keep in mind: Only feature layers, tables, and relationship classes are supported. If a feature layer references or participates in a relationship class that references unsupported data, the layer will not be included in the Runtime content. All of the layers in the current map must come from the same workspace. The following options are available for features and tabular data: Include feature and tabular data for read-only reference—Include all of the feature layers, tables, and relationship classes from the current map in the Runtime content. These layers will be read- only in your ArcGIS Runtime SDK-based application. If the Optimize size for view-only option is selected, the layer will be optimized for size and will be suitable for viewing only in your ArcGIS Runtime SDK-based application. For these layers All fields not used for rendering and labeling are removed. The precision of their spatial reference is set to 0.1 meters. They are not suitable for use with a network dataset. Do not include feature and tabular data—Do not include any of the features or tabular data from the current map in the Runtime content. Basemap If your map contains a basemap layer, you can include it in the Runtime content. Basemap layers will be used to create tile caches, a set of premade tiles suitable to use as basemaps in your Runtime applications. Tile caches typically display more quickly than other basemaps. Selecting this option increases the size of the content and the time it takes the content to be created. You can adjust tiling scheme and other settings to accommodate the balance for the level of detail and performance you want. For more information, see About tile packages. Note: If the data you need to show as your basemap must be queryable, selecting this option is not appropriate. Note: If you are including features, they're reprojected to the spatial reference of the tiling scheme. The following options are available: Use a basemap layer from the current map—Creates a tile cache from the selected basemap layer in the current map and includes it in the Runtime content. Do not include a basemap—Do not include a basemap in the Runtime content. Network Data If your map contains a network dataset or a network analysis layer that references a network dataset, you can include the network dataset in your Runtime content as a transportation network for routing and driving directions. When including a network, all feature layers the network references become part of the Runtime content. This may include layers that are not part of the map. For example, if you only have a network layer in the map, your Runtime content includes the streets, junctions, and turns feature classes associated with the network. For a network dataset to become a transportation network, there are a few restrictions to keep in mind: The network dataset must be part of a geodatabase. This excludes networks that are in SDC or shapefile format. The network dataset must be from ArcGIS 10.0 or later. If your network is from an earlier version, you can upgrade your geodatabase and your network. The network dataset cannot have an unknown coordinate system. The network dataset cannot use any VB or Python script evaluators. The network dataset cannot use any custom COM evaluators. A network dataset that uses live traffic will be ported to a transportation network, but the live traffic components are excluded since they are not supported. The following options are available: Include network data from the current map—Include all the network datasets referenced by the map. Do not include network data—Exclude network datasets from the Runtime content. Locator If your map contains a locator or composite locator, you can include the locator in your Runtime content. You can select one locator to add to the Runtime content. Create a composite locator if you want to include multiple locators. For more information, see Creating a composite address locator. There are a few restrictions on which locators can be added to the Runtime content: The locator must be created with ArcGIS 10.0 or later. The locator cannot have an unknown coordinate system. The locator or any participating locator in a composite locator cannot be a geocoding service, including services from Portal for ArcGIS or ArcGIS Online. The locator cannot contain a custom plug-in in the locator style configuration. The following options are available: Use a locator from the current map—Include the selected locator added to the map. Do not include a locator—Exclude any locators from the Runtime content. 26. Working with the Catalog window What is the Catalog window? ArcGIS applications include a Catalog window that is used to organize and manage various types of geographic information as logical collections—for example, the data, maps, and results of your current GIS project that you work with in ArcGIS. The Catalog window provides tools to accomplish the following: Browse and find geographic datasets to add to your map. Record, view, and manage datasets and ArcGIS documents. Search for and discover GIS data on local networks and the web. Define, export, and import geodatabase data models and datasets. Create and manage the schemas of geodatabases. Add connection to and administer ArcSDE geodatabases. Add connection to and administer ArcGIS Online (My Hosted Services). You can work with the Catalog window in ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene. Working with the tree view in the Catalog window Using the tree view in the Catalog window is much like using Windows Explorer, except the Catalog window focuses on viewing and working with GIS information. It shows you a list of folder connections, geodatabases, and GIS services. You can use the Location control as well as the tree view to navigate to workspace folders and geodatabases. In the Catalog window, you'll see your GIS contents organized in a tree view series of nodes—for the map's Home folder, other folder connections containing GIS contents you frequently use, and other types of ArcGIS connections. The panel underneath the tree view displays contents and properties of the item highlighted in the tree view. In the tree view, you can do the following: Click an item to preview its properties. Select items and drag them into ArcMap, geoprocessing models, and other dialog boxes. Review and update items and their descriptions. Perform various operations on each item by right-clicking the item to see its context menu. Using the stand-alone ArcCatalog application as an alternative to the Catalog window In addition to the Catalog window in ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene, there is a stand-alone application named ArcCatalog that can be used as an alternative for managing workspaces, geodatabases, GIS web services, and ArcGIS Online. ArcCatalog is used by administrators to manage their ArcGIS information. For example, administrators often use ArcCatalog to manage ArcSDE geodatabases and deployments of ArcGIS for Server because they do not need a corresponding map session. In addition, many use ArcCatalog to manage their standards-based metadata for item descriptions. See Working with standards-based metadata for more information. A quick tour of the Catalog window The Catalog window provides an integrated and unified tree view of all the data files, databases, and ArcGIS for Server documents available to you. The main menu of theCatalog window has tools for navigating to common locations such as your map's Home folder and the default geodatabase. Opening the Catalog window If the Catalog window is not visible in ArcMap, you can open it by clicking the Catalog button on the Standard toolbar or by clicking Windows > Catalog on the main menu. Working with a retractable Catalog window In ArcGIS, you can interactively dock and retract windows against the sides of the application window and slide them open as you need them. Retracting the Catalogwindow enables you to have more of your application window devoted to your map display. When the Catalog window is retracted, you'll see a Catalog menu tab on the side of the application. Pausing on this tab will open the Catalog window. Click the pushpin to hold the Catalog window open. You can close the Catalog window by clicking the X in the upper right corner. Catalog window The primary catalog view underneath the button menu provides a tree view of your GIS contents and is used to navigate and highlight items in the tree. When you highlight items, the contents panel underneath shows you information and details about the selected item. Right-clicking selected items will display their shortcut menus. Catalog window menu The main menu of the Catalog window has navigation and display tools to assist you in using the tree view. Back —Go to the previous folder. Forward —Go to the next folder. Up One Level —Move up one level in the tree. Go To Home Folder —Navigate to the Home folder. Go To Default Geodatabase —Connect to the default geodatabase. Choose View Used In Contents Panel —Change the view used in the Contents panel. Options are large icons, list, details, and thumbnails. Connect To Folder —Connect to a folder location. Toggle Contents Panel —Toggle the display of the Contents panel. Options —Open the Catalog Options dialog box. Note: The Catalog Options dialog box can be accessed from the Catalog window and ArcCatalog. The dialog box as accessed from the Catalog window does not contain the full set of tabs. You can change the Home folder location only through the Options dialog box accessed from the Catalog window. Nodes in the tree view In the Catalog window, you will see a series of high-level nodes in the tree view. These are used to establish connections to a number of workspace folders, geodatabases, toolboxes, GIS servers, and other resources: Home —This is the folder in which your map document is stored. You will always see the Home folder connection at the top of the Catalog tree. Folder Connections —These are connections to additional workspace folders. You'll see their contents listed under each folder. Toolboxes —This node is used to organize and access geoprocessing tools. Interoperability Connections —Used to access a number of special data formats in the optional Data Interoperability extension product. This is used to access Safe Software's FME product for GIS data interoperability. Database Servers —Used to connect as the administrator to geodatabases that are stored and managed in SQL Server Express. Database Connections —Used to make user connections to ArcSDE geodatabases in Oracle, SQL Server, SQL Server Express, IBM DB2, Informix, and PostGreSQL. GIS Servers —Used to make connections to ArcGIS for Server, ArcIMS servers, and a number of OGC WMS and WFS services. My Hosted Services—Used to connect to your ArcGIS Online servers. You must have access to ArcGIS Online. Working with the Home folder and default geodatabase Working with the Home folder One of the key workspaces in ArcMap is each map document's Home folder, which is the folder location where your map document is stored. The Home folder is used by default in ArcMap to save results, store new datasets, and access file-based information. It is the location that is initially used to add new layers to ArcMap and to store new datasets that are created during editing and geoprocessing. The same is true for nonspatial data. When you export a page layout as PDF, the default location will be the map's home location (the map document's workspace folder). Setting and changing the map's Home folder Anytime you copy a map document to a new file folder location, that will become the map's Home folder. You can use this to organize ArcGIS information. For example, a common folder might be used to hold a number of related map documents, in which case they share a common Home folder. You can access the map's Home folder in the Catalog window by clicking the Home button in the Catalog window menu. You can change the Home folder location by clicking the Options button and then the Home Folder tab on the Catalog Options dialog box. Enter the new Home location to be used for all new map documents. Working with the default geodatabase Each map document has a default geodatabase, which is the home location for the spatial content of your map. This location is used for adding datasets and for saving resultant datasets created by various editing and geoprocessing operations. For example, when you export features from a layer, the data will be saved in the map's default geodatabase unless specified otherwise. The default geodatabase is synchronized with Current Workspace of Geoprocessing Environments; therefore, all output from tools or models will be saved to this default location. When you create a new map document, you will be prompted to select a default geodatabase. You can set any of your geodatabases as the default geodatabase, provided you have write access. You may have a shared geodatabase that is stored or managed in a DBMS such as SQL Server or Oracle. The default geodatabase can be a file, personal, personal SQL Server, or enterprise geodatabase. You don't have to manually specify a default geodatabase for your document. By default, ArcGIS automatically creates a file geodatabase called Default.gdb in the ArcGIS Home folder. ArcMap, ArcScene, and ArcGlobe will use this geodatabase as the default geodatabase for new documents you create or existing pre-10 documents you open, unless you specify that you want to use a different geodatabase as the default. Access to the default geodatabase is available from the Catalog window menu, and as a shortcut on the Add Data and Save As dialog boxes, so that you can quickly get back to the map's default geodatabase if you have navigated elsewhere in the system. Setting the default geodatabase 1. Ensure that you have access. If necessary, for an enterprise geodatabase, establish a database connection. If you want to create a new file geodatabase, you can use the Catalog window to create a new geodatabase that will be your map's default. 2. Navigate to the desired geodatabase in the tree view and click to highlight it. Right-click the geodatabase to see its context menu and click Make Default Geodatabase. Note: The Make Default Geodatabase option is not available on the context menu of geodatabases accessed from the Database Servers node in the Catalog window. To use this functionality, connect to these geodatabases from the Database Connections node . You can also set the path to the default geodatabase on the Getting Started dialog box that appears when you start ArcMap: After you have created or opened a map document, you can change the default geodatabase at any time either via the Catalog window (right-click the geodatabase you want to use as the default for your current document and choose Make Default Geodatabase) or via the Map Document Properties dialog box (File > Map Document Properties). Describing items from the Catalog window A key aspect in working with ArcGIS is to document the content you create and use—your map, globe and scene documents, layers, geoprocessing models, geodatabase datasets, and so on. Information that describes items in ArcGIS is called metadata. When care is taken to provide good descriptions, you can find appropriate items with a search and evaluate which of the items in your search results is the correct one to use. In an item's metadata you can record whatever information is important for your organization to know about that item. This might include information about how accurate and recent the item is, restrictions associated with using and sharing the item, important processes in its life cycle such as generalizing features, and so on. The default Item Description metadata style lets you see and edit a simple set of metadata properties for an item. Only one page of information is available when editing metadata with this style. This style is designed to facilitate providing information that is used by ArcGIS; it is indexed and available for searching and can be published with the item to ArcGIS Online. The Item Description metadata style is straightforward and effective, suitable for anyone who doesn't need to adhere to specific metadata standards. You can provide more information about an item using the other metadata styles that are provided with ArcGIS for Desktop. These styles support capturing metadata content that corresponds to different community-adopted standards. When you create metadata in this manner you can share information about your resources with others in your community outside of ArcGIS. For example, you might publish it to a community metadata catalog that is based on the Esri Geoportal Server. The ArcGIS item description can be exported to various standard XML metadata formats using metadata conversion tools. Editing the Item Description The Description tab lets you view and edit metadata for ArcGIS items. You can provide a concise Item Description with the default settings. To create detailed metadata for an item instead, choose a different metadata style. You can create a stand-alone metadata XML file that serves as a template for all the items associated with a project. If you have a template, you can import it and then start editing to add information that specifically describes the item. 1. In the Catalog window, navigate to an item, right-click, then choose Item Description. The Description tab is displayed. Note: Some content on this page is the same for all items, including the title, thumbnail, description, and tags. Other content on the Item Description page is specific to one type of item. For example, a tool's description includes information about its parameters and can include example code. 2. If you have write access, you can click the Edit button and edit the description of your item. You can provide a thumbnail picture, set tags, and write a short summary and a longer description. You can also record credits and acknowledgments for item authors and contributors, and any limitations that apply when someone uses the item. If you have existing metadata, click the Import button. 3. Note: 4. When you create a package to share an item, you must provide a summary and tags that describe the item. Therefore, this information is identified as being mandatory when you edit the Item Description. Adding connections Using folder connections It's a good idea to organize GIS content into a set of commonly used workspace folders. These are file folders on disk used to organize your GIS projects. They contain map documents, layers, file geodatabases, geoprocessing tools, scripts, and so on. An initial task in using the Catalog window is to establish a series of connections to the workspace folders whose content you plan to work with in ArcGIS. Each map has a Home folder, which is the folder in which the map document is stored. You can use the Home folder as the common location for organizing many of the contents used in your map document, such as a file geodatabase and its datasets, layer files, and other GIS information related to your map. Steps for creating additional folder connections The Catalog window gives you a mechanism for connecting to and working with GIS information in a number of workspace folders. The initial task is to establish a folder connection to each. 1. Navigate to the Folder Connections node in the catalog window tree. 2. Right-click the node and choose Connect To Folder. 3. Type the path or navigate to the desired workspace folder and click OK. Tip: You can create a new folder connection by dragging a folder from the tree view onto the Folder Connections node. Working with folder connections in the Catalog window Once you have established a folder connection, you can use the Catalog window to navigate the contents of the folder. For example: Double-click a map document to open it in ArcMap. Add data to ArcMap by dragging datasets and layer files into the data frame. Use the same procedure to add items to a geoprocessing tool or into ModelBuilder. Right-click an item and select Item Description to view its metadata. Connecting to a file or personal geodatabase from the Catalog window A file geodatabase is a collection of files in a folder on disk. Personal geodatabases are stored in Microsoft Access databases (.mdb files), which are also stored in a folder on disk. Therefore, to connect to a file or personal geodatabase, you create a connection to the folder that contains the geodatabase. Steps: 1. If you have not done so already, create a connection to the folder. To do this, click the Connect To Folder button on the Standard toolbar. Alternatively, you can right-click the Folder Connections node and choose Connect Folder. 2. Navigate to the location of the folder on the local or network computer. 3. Click OK to establish the folder connection that contains the file or personal geodatabase. The folder connection is created under the Folder Connections node in the Catalog window. 4. Expand the folder connection. 5. Click the file or personal geodatabase to which you want to connect. Creating an interoperability connection The ArcGIS Data Interoperability extension adds support for a large number of nonnative spatial data and table formats. You can create interoperability connections to supported formats and manage them in the Catalog tree as direct-read datasets. You can use interoperability connections anyplace where you can specify a data source, such as adding data to ArcMap or as input to geoprocessing tools. Installing the Data Interoperability extension enables interoperability connections for reading WFS services and GML-SF (simple features) datasets. Purchasing a Data Interoperability license and enabling the extension in the ArcGIS for Desktop application adds additional out-of-the-box support for GIS, CAD, raster, and database formats. The following steps describe how to create an interoperability connection: Steps: 1. In Catalog Tree, expand the Interoperability Connections folder. 2. Double-click Add Interoperability Connection. 3. Click the Format browse (ellipsis) button to open FME Reader Gallery. 4. Choose the desired format and click OK. 5. Click the Dataset browse (ellipsis) button and select the dataset. 6. Click OK to close the Interoperability Connection dialog box. Connecting to a geodatabase in SQL Server Express Most users need to access and work with datasets in geodatabases, but not to perform administration tasks. If you are connecting to an ArcSDE geodatabase in SQL Server Express licensed through ArcGIS for Desktop, ArcGIS Engine, or ArcGIS for Server Workgroup to create or work with the data in the geodatabase, create a connection file using the Database Connection dialog box, which can be accessed from the Database Connections node in the Catalog window. You need the following information to connect using the Database Connection dialog box: The name of the SQL Server Express instance The name of the database Follow these steps to create a user connection to a geodatabase in SQL Server Express: Steps: 1. Expand the Database Connections node in the Catalog window in ArcMap. 2. Double-click Add Database Connection. The Database Connection dialog box opens. 3. Choose SQL Server from the Database Platform drop-down list. 4. Type the name of the SQL Server Express instance in the Instance text box. SQL Server Express instances used for database servers are always named instances. Therefore, you will provide the instance name in this format: <computername>\<instance>; for example, yourcomputer\sqlex1. 5. Type the name of the geodatabase to connect to in the Database text box. 6. Choose Operating system authentication from the Type drop-down list. 7. Click OK to make the connection. A new connection file is created under the Database Connections node in the Catalog tree. Tip: You can reopen the Database Connection dialog box to change the connection information by right- clicking the connection file and clicking Connection Properties. Connecting to an enterprise geodatabase or database from the Catalog tree You connect to an enterprise geodatabase or database using the Database Connection dialog box, which you access from the Database Connections node in the Catalog tree in ArcGIS for Desktop. When you connect to a database, you choose the type of database to which you will connect then provide information to help ArcGIS locate the database and authentication information to allow you to log in to the database. In most cases, your database or GIS administrator will provide you with the information you need to make a connection, and you will type it into the Database Connectiondialog box. Once you have the necessary information, follow these steps to create a connection to the geodatabase: Steps: 1. Expand the Database Connections node in the Catalog tree. 2. Double-click Add Database Connection. The Database Connection dialog box opens. 3. From the Database Platform drop-down list, choose the type of database to which you are connecting. 4. The rest of the information you provide depends on which database platform you choose to connect to. See Database connections in ArcGIS for Desktop for further instructions. Adding OLE DB connections to databases OLE DB connections in ArcGIS are used to make read-only connections to tabular data sources. This type of connection is most commonly used to connect from ArcGIS to data sources that support OLE DB but cannot be accessed from the Database Connection dialog box in ArcGIS for Desktop. You can create and manage OLE DB connections by adding the Add OLE DB connection button to a toolbar in ArcCatalog. Connection files created from this button are listed in the Database Connections folder in the Catalog tree. Steps: 1. Start ArcCatalog. 2. Add the OLE DB Connection command as a button to a toolbar in ArcCatalog. a. Click Customize on the main menu and click Customize mode. The Customize dialog box opens. b. Click the Commands tab. c. Choose ArcCatalog from the Categories list. d. Drag Add OLE DB Connection from the Commands list onto a toolbar in ArcCatalog. The Add OLE DB Connection button is added to the toolbar. 3. Click Close on the Customize dialog box. 4. Click the Add OLE DB Connection button. The Data Link Properties dialog box appears in which you can create an OLE DB connection. 5. Click the OLE DB provider you want to use to access data. 6. Click Next or click the Connection tab. 7. Provide the required connection information. The Connection tab is different for each provider. Most require that you identify the database to which you want to connect along with your user name and password. 8. Click Test Connection to validate that you have entered connection information correctly. 9. Click OK once your test is successful. The OLE DB data source you added is displayed in the Database Connection folder. Click F5 to refresh the Catalog tree if the connection does not display. 10. Name your OLE DB connection. Connecting to GIS servers You can work with many types of GIS servers. The first step in every case is to establish a connection to the GIS server in the Catalog window. This topic describes the steps for each type of GIS server. Connecting to ArcGIS for Server You can connect to an ArcGIS Server site using the Catalog window in ArcMap, ArcScene, or ArcGlobe. There are three levels of connection you can make—user, publisher, or administrative— which determine the functions you're allowed to perform on the server once you make the connection. When you connect, you type in a user name and password, which the server checks to see whether you have the permissions to make the type of connection you're requesting. The links below take you to more detailed instructions about connecting to ArcGIS for Server. Making a user connection to ArcGIS Server in ArcGIS for Desktop Making a publisher connection to ArcGIS Server in ArcGIS for Desktop Making an administrative connection to ArcGIS Server in ArcGIS for Desktop Connecting to ArcIMS Here are the steps to connect to an ArcIMS server in ArcMap, ArcScene, or ArcGlobe: 1. In the Catalog window, expand the GIS Servers node and double-click Add ArcIMS Server. 2. The Add ArcIMS Server dialog box appears. 3. Type the ArcIMS server URL and other properties for your ArcIMS connection. 4. Click OK. The ArcIMS server connection is added as an item in your GIS Servers tree view. You can expand and work with the services provided by this connection. Connecting to WMS, WMTS or WCS Here are the steps to connect to WCS and WMS servers in ArcMap, ArcScene, or ArcGlobe: 1. In the Catalog window, expand the GIS Servers node and double-click Add WCS Server, Add WMS Server or Add WMTS Server. 2. The Add WMS Server, Add WMTS Server or Add WCS Server dialog box appears. 3. Type the server URL and other properties for your connection. 4. Click OK. The WMS, WMTS or WCS server connection is added as an item in your GIS Servers tree view. You can expand and work with the services provided by this connection. III. WORKING WITH LAYERS 1.What is a layer? Layers are the mechanism used to display geographic datasets in ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene. Each layer references a dataset and specifies how that dataset is portrayed using symbols and text labels. When you add a layer to a map, you specify its dataset and set its map symbols and labeling properties. Each map, globe, or scene document in ArcGIS is assembled by adding a series of layers. Layers are displayed in a particular order displayed in the map's table of contents. Layers listed at the bottom are displayed first, followed by the layers above them. Layers provide one of the primary ways that you work with geographic data in ArcGIS. For example: You can access attribute information for feature layers by opening the layer's attribute table, clicking on a feature using the Identify tool, or utilizing HTML pop-ups. You work with map layers to edit data and add new features. You can drag and drop layers as inputs into analytic models using geoprocessing, and model results are often viewed and explored as new map layers. There are a number of toolbars for working with map layers, depending on the type of layer. For example, you can work with image layers using a special image classification toolbar. 2.A quick tour of map layers Maps in ArcGIS are composed of a series of map layers drawn in a particular order. A map layer defines how a GIS dataset is symbolized and labeled (that is, portrayed) in your map views. A layer represents geographic data in ArcMap, such as a particular theme of data. Examples of map layers include streams and lakes, terrain, roads, political boundaries, parcels, building footprints, utility lines, and orthophoto imagery. Each map layer is used to display and work with a specific GIS dataset. A layer references the data stored in geodatabases, coverages, shapefiles, imagery, rasters, CAD files, and so on, rather than actually storing the geographic data. Thus, a layer always reflects the most up-to-date information in your database. A layer won't draw on your map unless you also have access to the data source on which the layer is based. When you create a new layer by adding a dataset, the layer will draw using a default set of drawing properties. So one of your first steps will be to set the layer's symbology and other display properties. Initial layer display after adding a new layer When you add a dataset to ArcMap, it is represented as a map layer and displayed using default symbols. One of the initial steps is to set display properties for your new layer. Layers are also the way that you work with GIS datasets in ArcGIS, for example: Layers define how features identify and report themselves. Layers are used to edit geodatabase datasets. Layers are used to define how you work with feature attributes. Layers can be saved to a file on disk as a layer file (.lyr). A layer can also be saved with its data as a layer package (.lpk). When you add a layer file to another map, it will draw exactly as it was saved. You can share layers and layer packages over the network, on the web, and via e-mail. Layer properties Layers have a number of properties that you can work with and set. Right-click a layer in the table of contents and click Properties to view the Layer Properties dialog box. The Layer Properties dialog box is where you set symbology, labeling, drawing rules, and other options. For example, you can specify that streams are drawn using blue lines, parcels are drawn based on their land-use code, parks are drawn using a green pattern fill and are labeled with their park names, digital elevation is portrayed as a shaded relief, and so on. In addition, other layer properties can be set, for example: The scales at which a layer will be visible Which subset of features to draw from the data source The location of the layer's dataset Attribute properties, joins, and relates for working with tabular information Layers in the table of contents The table of contents lets you specify which layers are displayed on the map (by turning them on and off). In addition, the order of the layer list in the table of contents determines the drawing order of layers on the map—layers higher in the table of contents are drawn on top of those that are lower. To change the drawing order, click the table of contents List By Drawing Order button , click and hold a layer name, then drag it up or down in the table of contents to a new position. Working with layer attributes You can work with attribute tables for the datasets referenced by each map layer. Right-click a layer in the table of contents and click Open Attribute Table. In the Tablewindow, you can perform queries, make selections, locate features on the map, and so on. Click the Table window's Table Options menu to create graphs and reports, change the font for the table, print the table, and perform various other operations. When you select an item in a table or graph, the feature is also selected on the map (and vice versa). When you work with a layer's attribute table, you can first set various display properties for tables. You do this by clicking the Fields tab on the Layer Properties dialog box to specify which fields will appear when you open the layer's table, what the fields will be named (using alias names), and how numeric fields will be formatted. You can also specify these options for an individual field by right- clicking a field heading in the table window and clicking Properties. Joins and relates between layers and attribute tables Related data is often gathered and stored in multiple layers and tables. Some examples of related data stored in different layers and tables include A Parcel layer and an Owner table that contain information about the parcel owners A States layer and a County layer that contain census data by county for each state A Utility Pole layer and a Transformer layer that list all the transformers mounted on each utility pole Even though the data is stored in different layers and tables, you will often need to identify related data to perform queries and edit related data. ArcMap provides three methods to associate related data: relates, joins, and spatial joins. Relate—A relate defines a relationship between two attribute tables using a key common to both tables. Relates allow you to access related data when you work with a layer's attributes. A relate is similar to a simple relationship class except it can involve data from different workspaces (for example, a dBASE table can be related to a coverage) and is stored in a layer file or ArcMap document. Learn more about relates Join—When you join two tables, you append the attributes from one table onto the other based on a field common to both. Joins are primarily used to label and symbolize your layer based on the associated data. Learn more about joins Spatial join—When the layers on your map don't share a common attribute field, you can join them using a spatial join. This joins the attributes of two layers based on the location of the features in the layers. Spatial joins are different from attribute joins in that they are not dynamic and require the results to be saved to a new output layer. Different types of layers There are different kinds of layers. Some layers represent a particular type of geographic feature, while others represent a particular type of data. Each layer type has different mechanisms for displaying and symbolizing its contents and specific operations that you will perform against them. Many layers have special sets of tools for working with the layer and its contents. For example, you can use the Editor toolbar to manipulate feature layers and the Topology toolbar to work with the contents of a topology layer. Here are a few of the common layer types: Feature layer—A layer that references a set of feature (vector) data that represents geographic entities as points, lines, and polygons. A feature layer's data source can be a geodatabase feature class, a shapefile, an ArcInfo Coverage, a CAD file, and so on. Raster layer—A layer that references a raster or image as its data source. Service layer—A layer used to display ArcGIS for Server, ArcIMS, WMS services, and other web services. Geoprocessing layer—A layer that displays the output of a geoprocessing tool. Basemap layer—A type of group layer that provides high-performance display of basemap content. Group layers Group layers are used to organize a set of related layers together. They combine multiple layers that are often displayed and managed together. Group layers can help organize related layers in a map and can be used to define advanced drawing options. There are many reasons for grouping layers together to manage their display. Here are a few examples that help illustrate their use. Thematic organization—Suppose you want to organize how parcels are displayed as a theme. You can organize a group layer that contains a subset of map layers—one for parcel polygons, another for parcel boundaries, and a third that displays parcel labels as annotation. Group layers for each map scale—Many users build multiscale maps that portray information differently at each map scale. To do this, you can build group layers for each map scale in your map so that all the layers that portray data at a particular resolution can be managed together. You can set scale-dependent drawing for the set of layers to be drawn at each map scale. In the example map below, you can see group layers for a set of map scales. The group layer that displays that map between 1:15,000 and 1:18,000 is expanded to show its sublayers. Common layer tasks Here are some of the common operations that you'll use with layers in ArcGIS. Common task Where to go for more information Adding data to ArcMap Adding layers to a map Setting layer properties Setting layer properties Displaying layers at certain scales Displaying a subset of features in a layer Referencing datasets with layers Referencing data in the map Repairing broken data links Saving a layer Saving layers and layer packages Symbolizing data in a layer Drawing all features with a single symbol Drawing features to show categories Drawing features to show quantities Using feature attributes to create map labels Displaying labels Specifying the drawing order for layers Setting the layer drawing order in the table of contents Opening a layer's attribute table Opening a layer's attribute table Relating data Working with related tables Setting HTML display properties for a map layer Setting HTML pop-up properties for feature layers Creating a map layer for delivery using KML What is KML? 3.Essential layer vocabulary Basemap layer A type of map layer that provides an optimized map display on which you display your dynamic operational information. Basemap display performance is very fast. ArcMap computes the basemap display once and reuses it each time you pan and zoom your map. Definition query Queries that define a subset of features in a dataset that will be displayed by a map layer. Many datasets are very large and can cover huge areas. Other datasets contain a number of subclasses of features. In these cases, it is useful to define a query expression that selects a subset of features for the layer. A definition query is used to specify this subset of features. It is accessed through the Definition Query tab on the Layer Properties dialog box. Group layer A group layer contains other layers. Group layers help organize related kinds of layers in a map and can be used to define advanced drawing options. For example, group layers can be used to create thematic layers from a series of related layers (for example, a surface elevation group layer represented by layers for shaded relief, contours, and elevation points or a hydro layer composed of layers for stream lines, rivers, and lakes). Group layers are also used in multiscale maps with a group layer for each map scale. Scale-dependent drawing is defined for each group layer. Layer properties The primary dialog box where you define the layer's display and attribute characteristics for working with the layer. You can specify the layer's data source, a query to define a subset of features to display, set symbology and labeling properties, information pop-up rules, and many additional properties for each map layer. Right-click and select Properties to open the Layer Properties dialog box. Renderer The type of display method used to draw a map layer. For example, there are renderers to fill polygons using a number of categories based on unique attribute values, renderers to display shaded relief of digital elevation models, and multivalue renderers to draw charts showing statistical information about each feature. There are numerous types of renderers that are used to display layers. Renderers tend to vary by the type of map layer. For example, see Renderers used to display raster data for a discussion of rendering raster datasets. Representation A special mechanism used to portray map layers using advanced symbols, rules, and renderers. For example, you can display bridges, tunnels, and overpasses in a cartographically pleasing way even though your street data is represented as a series of road centerlines. Representations can portray geographic features in very flexible ways using advanced renderers. Scale-dependent display Scale-dependent display defines the range of map scales at which the layer is visible in the map display. This is useful for ensuring that datasets that are suitable for display in one scale range are not visible in your map document unless you are within the appropriate scale range. It also enables you to define layer display rules that are appropriate for each range of map scales, which is very useful when building multiscale maps. You can set scale-dependent drawing properties on the General tab of theLayer Properties dialog box. 4.Managing layers 4.1. Adding layers to a map Each layer references a dataset that is stored in a geodatabase, coverage, shapefile, raster, and so on. It's easy to add layers to a map—you simply select a dataset and drag it from the Catalog or Search window onto your map or add a dataset using the Add Data button. Once each layer is added to your map, you'll typically set the symbology and labeling properties and organize the drawing order of the layers in your table of contents to make your map work well. If your data is stored in a format supported by ArcMap, you can add it directly to your map as a layer. If your data isn't stored in a supported format, you can use the data conversion utilities in ArcToolbox or the Data Interoperability extension to convert practically any data and display it in your map. Adding map layers There are a number of ways to add map layers. Each of them is covered here. Adding a dataset To create a new map layer, simply add a dataset to your map, globe, or 3D scene. There are a few ways to add datasets: Using the Add Data button—Click the Add Data button and navigate to the desired dataset. Then select and add it to your map. Tip: When you use the Add Data button in ArcMap for the first time in a new session, it automatically returns to the last location you added data from. By unchecking Return to last used location when Add Data dialog first used on theGeneral tab of the ArcMap Options dialog box, the Add Data dialog box will instead default to the top level of the Catalog tree. This improves the performance of the Add Data command because you don't have to wait while it reconnects to the network drive, database location, or GIS server that you accessed in your previous session. To open the ArcMap Options dialog box, click Customize > ArcMap Options. Copying or dragging a layer—You can move layers between data frames or maps by copying and pasting or dragging the layer from one data frame to another. Dragging a dataset from the Catalog window—You can navigate to datasets and add them directly in ArcMap. Using the Catalog window, navigate to the desired dataset. Drag the dataset into the map's data frame. Dragging a dataset from the Search window—You can add data to your map from the Search window. Click Data, enter the search terms to find the desired dataset, then drag the dataset into the map's data frame. See Using search in ArcGIS for more information. Dragging a dataset from ArcCatalog—You can add data to your map from the ArcCatalog application. In ArcCatalog, navigate to the desired dataset. Then drag it onto the ArcMap data frame. Adding multiple datasets—You can select and add multiple datasets at one time by highlighting all of the desired datasets instead of a single one when adding. Tip: When you uncheck the Make newly added layers visible by default option on the General tab of the ArcMap Optionsdialog box, new layers that you add will appear in the table of contents but not be automatically turned on (drawn on the map). For example, if you are working with large datasets that may take a long time to draw, it might be good to uncheck this box so you can set properties before turning on the layer in the table of contents. Open the dialog box by clicking Customize > ArcMap Options. Adding data from ArcGIS Online You can add data and layers that are published and shared online by the ArcGIS community. See Adding data from ArcGIS online for more information. Setting layer symbology When you create a new layer by adding a dataset, the layer will be drawn using a default set of drawing properties. So one of your first steps will be to set the layer's symbology and other display properties. See About displaying layers for more information. Setting the layer drawing order When adding a new layer, it will automatically be placed above others of the same type. For example, a new line feature will be placed above other line features. Thus, you'll want to position layers appropriately. For example, you may want to place layers that form the background of your map, such as an ocean layer, at or near the bottom of the table of contents. The default layer drawing order—If you simultaneously add a number of datasets to your map, the new layers in your map will be ordered as follows (raster on the bottom): 1. Annotation 2. Features Point Line Polygon TIN/Terrain Raster For more information, see Listing by drawing order. Common layer operations Once a layer is part of a map, you can do all of the following: Toggle the layer display on and off. Move layers from one data frame to another. Set scale-dependent drawing for your layer. Choose which features or subset of features to display. Set layer properties and symbolize the layer. Label the layer. Save layers and layer packages for sharing. Display and work with tabular information about a layer. Organize a logical collection of layers into a group layer for various purposes. Add the layer to a basemap layer for increased display performance. When layers aren't being drawn on the map When layers are turned on but are not being drawn on the map, the table of contents may provide some clues. In the table of contents below, all the layers are checked on for display, but the parks and lakes layers do not appear in the map display. In the example below, the parks layer is not drawing because the link to its data source is broken, indicated by the red exclamation point (!) beside the check box. The lakes layer is not drawing because the current display map scale of the data frame is outside the layer's visible scale range, indicated by the dimmed scale bar under the check box. See repairing broken data links and displaying layers at certain scales for more information. Removing layers from a map When you no longer need a layer on your map, you can remove it. Select the layer, right-click, and choose Remove. Removing a layer doesn't affect the underlying data source on which the layer is based. You can delete (and manage) data sources, such as a feature class, using theCatalog window. Adding layers to a map from Windows, e-mails, or Web pages Layer files and layer packages are registered to the ArcGIS for Desktop applications, allowing you to double-click them in Windows Explorer, Microsoft Outlook, the Windows Desktop, and so on, and add them directly to your current ArcMap or ArcGlobe session. Layer files will appear with the familiar yellow icon. Clicking layer files embedded in Web pages will also add them into your session. If you don't have an ArcGIS for Desktop application running, opening a layer file will automatically start the appropriate application: ArcMap will start and add the layer into the empty map, or in the case of layer files containing 3D-only content, ArcGlobe will start and add the layer into the globe. 4.2. Working with group layers A group layer contains other layers. Group layers help organize related kinds of layers in a map and can be used to define advanced drawing options. For example, suppose you have two layers on a map representing railroads and highways. You could group these layers together and name the resulting layer Transportation Networks. If you need to, you can even create nested group layers (groups of group layers). A group layer behaves similarly to other layers in the table of contents. Turning off the visibility of a group layer turns off the visibility of all its component layers. A group layer's properties override any conflicting properties of its constituent layers. For example, a visible scale range set on a layer will be overridden by a visible scale range of the group layer. You can change the properties of any of the layers inside a group layer. Change the drawing order of the layers in the group layer by reordering them in the table of contents. You can add and remove layers as needed. You can also use symbol-level drawing for all the symbols that the layers inside the group layer use by opening a group layer'sGroup Layer Properties dialog box and clicking the Symbol Levels button on the Group tab. Creating group layers There are a number of ways to create group layers. These include the following: Adding a new group layer to a data frame—Right-click the name of the data frame and choose New Group Layer to add one. A group layer named New Group Layer is added to your table of contents. You can then add new sublayers by right-clicking the new group layer and clicking Add Data or by dragging layers into your group layer. Selecting a set of layers to put into a group layer—Select a set of layers that you want to combine into a group layer, right-click one of the highlighted layers, then choose Group. This creates a new group layer and adds the highlighted layers as its sublayers. Adding layers to a group layer—You can drag layers into group layers. In the table of contents, click the desired layer and drag it directly underneath the group layer. When the insertion bar is at the end of a group layer, a small indicator at the left end of the bar appears: If you are dragging data into a group layer from the Catalog window, pause the pointer over any data frame or group layer expansion control to expand or collapse it, allowing you to drop the data exactly where it belongs. Removing layers from a group layer—You can right-click the layer name inside the group layer and click Remove. You can also drag a layer out of a group layer. When you see the indicator on the insertion bar, move the mouse pointer either left or right to indicate where you want the layer dropped. If you want to drop the layer beneath the group layer (instead of into it), move the mouse pointer to the left. The insertion bar extends to the left to show that the layer will be dropped under the group layer. Managing the layers within a group layer In addition to using the table of contents, you can use the Group Layer Properties dialog box to manage the set of layers in a group layer. Double-click the layer name or right-click and click Properties. The Group tab on the Group Layer Properties dialog box can be used to add and remove layers from the group layer, reorder the layers, set symbol-level drawingproperties, and access the properties of the layers in the group layer. Use the Display tab to set the group layer's contrast, brightness, and transparency. Tip: You can also set transparency interactively instead of typing in a value. To do so, close this dialog box and open theEffects toolbar. On the toolbar, select this layer from the drop-down list of layers and click the Adjust Transparency button on the toolbar. Slide the slider to the desired level. Group layers in dialog box lists Layer lists in dialog boxes and other parts of the ArcGIS interface show which layers belong to group layers. These lists match the way the layers are organized in the table of contents. Each layer is listed with its layer icon from ArcCatalog so you can easily see what type of data each layer contains. You can expand and contract the list to quickly access the layer you want to use. If the layer names are long, a horizontal bar at the bottom of the drop-down list lets you scroll through the list sideways. 4.3. Adding x,y coordinate data as a layer In addition to data sources, such as a shapefile, you can add tabular data that contains geographic locations in the form of x,y coordinates to your map. If the table also contains z-coordinates, such as elevation values, you can add tabular data as 3D content into your globe or scene. X,Y coordinates describe points on the earth's surface such as the location of fire hydrants in a city or the points where water samples were collected. You can easily collect x,y coordinate data using a GPS (also, frequently an elevation [z]-value). To add a table of x,y coordinates to your map, globe, or scene, the table must contain two fields: one for the x-coordinate and one for the y-coordinate. The values in the fields may represent any coordinate system and units such as latitude and longitude or meters. A field for the z-coordinates that enables 3D geometry is optional. The fields must be numeric. If the fields are not numeric, such as when the coordinate value is stored in degrees, minutes, and seconds (for example, -120 13 58), the coordinates will be converted and displayed as decimal degrees. Once you have added the data to your map, globe, or scene, it becomes an x,y event layer and behaves like other point feature layers. For instance, you can decide whether you want to display it, symbolize it, set the visible scale, or display a subset of features that meet some criteria. In 3D, you can also change properties such as the layer's vertical exaggeration or its offset from an elevation surface. Steps for adding x,y data as a layer 1. Click File > Add Data > Add XY Data. 2. Select the table that contains x,y coordinate data. 3. Identify the columns that hold the x- and y-coordinates (and, optionally, the z-coordinate). 4. Specify the coordinate system. You can also add x,y data in tables as a new feature class using geoprocessing. Note: As an alternative, you can use the Catalog window to select the table that contains the x,y columns and create a feature class. X,Y event layers and ObjectID fields If the table on which an x,y event layer is based does not have an ObjectID field, you won't be able to perform certain tasks on the layer. Delimited text files or tables from OLE DB connections are some examples of tables without ObjectID fields. Without an ObjectID field, you will not be able to do the following: Select features in the map layer. Perform operations that utilize the selection set such as navigating from the table to the map. Edit layer attributes. However, you can edit the table the layer is based on directly on disk such as in a text editor if the file is a .txt file—including changing the x-, y-, and z-coordinates of the point features. Your changes will be reflected the next time you refresh the view. Note that you can start an edit session on an x,y event layer if the table it is based on has an ObjectID field and if the data source is editable. This will let you edit the layer's attributes in the table window—including editing the x-, y-, and z-coordinate fields manually to change the location of the points in the layer. Perform any interactive edits, such as select points in an edit session and move them around, delete them, and add new points, on any x,y event layer. This is true whether or not the table it is based on has an ObjectID field. Define a relate. If you want to be able to perform these tasks, you can export the x,y layer to a feature class using the steps below or follow the steps above to use the Catalog window to create a feature class from an x,y table. Both of these procedures create a fully functional feature class with an ObjectID field. Saving an x,y layer as a feature class You can save the contents of an x,y layer as a feature class using the following steps: 1. Right-click the x,y layer name and click Data > Export Data. The Export Data dialog box opens. 2. Set the output coordinate system and specify the location and name of the new feature class. 3. Click OK to save the new feature class. 4.4. Changing a layer's drawing order The order in which layers are listed in the table of contents determines how layers are drawn on a map. Within a data frame, the layers listed at the top of the Display tab will draw over those listed below them, and so on, down the list. You can easily move layers around to adjust their drawing order or organize them in separate data frames. Seeing which layers are drawn under a layer The Swipe tool on the Effects toolbar is used to interactively reveal layers beneath the layer you chose to swipe. This tool makes it easy to quickly see what is underneath a particular layer without having to turn it off in the table of contents or reorder layers. To use the tool, choose the layer or group layer you want to swipe from the Layer drop-down list on the Effects toolbar, then move the pointer over the map. You'll notice that the pointer changes based on whether you are pausing it at the top, bottom, left, or right of the map. This lets you choose the direction you want to swipe the layer. Hold down the mouse button and drag. This will swipe the layer in the direction you were pausing on. You can also hold down either the CTRL or SHIFT key and the mouse button to swipe without having to drag left/right or up/down. The Flicker tool on the Effects toolbar automatically flickers the layer chosen in the Layer drop- down list on and off using the time interval specified in milliseconds in theFlicker Rate input box. Click the Flicker button again or pan and zoom the map to stop flickering. Flicker is particularly useful for temporal change detection (especially of satellite images or aerial photographs taken at different times of the same location), data quality comparison, and other analyses where you want to see the difference between layers. Very fast flicker rates can be used to make differences between layers appear to jump out due to the optical effect of the eye being attracted to changes between rapidly alternating displays (an effect also exploited by the early experiments in cinematography). Both tools only work in data view. Steps: 1. On the Display tab, drag the layer up or down in the table of contents. A black line indicates where the layer will be placed. 2. Release the mouse button to drop the layer in its new position. Tip: Typically, annotation layers will be drawn on the map in the order they appear in the table of contents, which may result in annotation being hidden underneath other layers. However, you have the option of making an annotation layer always draw above other layers. To do this, open the Layer Properties dialog box for the annotation layer, click the Display tab, then uncheck Draw this layer in its table of contents order relative to other layers. When unchecked, the annotation layer will always draw on top of other layers, even if it is at the bottom of the table of contents. In cases where there are multiple annotation layers in a map, the drawing order among the annotation layers is determined by their relative positions in the table of contents. Keep in mind that requiring an annotation layer to always be drawn above other layers will increase draw times and thereby hinder performance. 4.5. Working with basemap layers Designing your desktop maps for high-quality display while maintaining good performance is always a key goal. One of the ways that you can improve display performance is by using basemap layers. Basemap layers are a kind of map layer that provides a framework onto which you display your dynamic operational information. Basemap display performance is very fast. Since basemap layers are relatively static and do not change frequently, their display can be computed once and reused many times. The first time you visit an area at a particular map scale, basemap layer display is computed. The display is recalled on return visits to that area and map scale. Characteristics of GIS basemaps In many ArcMap applications, users have basemaps onto which operational information, observations, and derived information from analytic models are displayed and used. For example: Orthoimagery is often used as a general base onto which operational information is overlaid. In utilities applications, a land base of parcel boundaries, buildings, and other built features are often used as a basemap. Many city maps use the street network as a basemap on top of which layers such as incidents and events are displayed. A basemap is used for locational reference and provides a framework on which users overlay or mash up their operational layers, perform tasks, and visualize geographic information. The basemap serves as a foundation for all subsequent operations and mapping. Basemaps provide the context and a framework for working with information geographically. Many maps can include multiple basemap layers. For example, you might have a basemap for terrain on top of which you overlay your key operational information. Then on top of these, you might add a reference layer of information, which is also a basemap layer. For example, this geology map has two basemap layers—the terrain underneath as one basemap layer and the transportation, hydro, and place-names as a second basemap layer overlaid on top of geologic features: Basemaps tend to be relatively static and, in a typical setting, are updated on an infrequent basis. In addition, basemaps are often designed to be used at multiple map scales. The basemap portrays appropriate content at each range of map scales. GIS users can follow a number of strategies for building and deploying basemaps for their GIS applications, including the following: Using basemap layers in ArcMap, which is covered in this topic. Adding basemap layers based on services with the Add Basemap command in the Add Data menu. Adding cached map services delivered via ArcGIS for Server, ArcGIS.com, or Bing Maps. Creating a basemap layer First, design your basemap layers. Identify layers that are a relatively static part of your map display. Also, think about using scale-dependent drawing. This requires a map design that considers how the map is to be portrayed at each map scale. 1. Once you have your map design, create each map layer in ArcMap following the normal steps. 2. Add a new basemap layer to your map. Right-click the data frame name in the table of contents and click New Basemap Layer. 3. This adds a new basemap layer in your table of contents. The basemap layer behaves much like a group layer in that you can drag content into it. 4. Select the layers that will comprise your basemap and drag them into the basemap layer. 5. Rename your new basemap layer. Once you have set this up, each time you display your map, the basemap layers are drawn using optimized map display logic. Other layers are drawn dynamically to access the latest updates from their data sources. Analyzing a basemap layer for drawing performance You may find that the layers you have added to your basemap layer have warning or error icons on them. Error icons indicate that you may have content incompatible with a basemap layer. Warning icons indicate potential performance problems or display differences you might see when using these layers in a basemap layer. Basemap layers use a high-performance drawing engine for fast display. This engine may draw some layers differently. To find out more information about drawing differences and other problems, you can analyze your basemap layer and use the diagnostics messages to improve display performance. Steps 1. Right-click the basemap layer in the table of contents and click Analyze Basemap Layer. A performance analysis is initiated of the layers in your basemap layer, and a diagnostic report of potential drawing performance issues is generated. 2. The error report identifies any potential drawing performance issues and provides recommendations on what you can do to address the issue. This analysis approach is similar to the approach used when analyzing and publishing map services. Tip: Before you create a basemap layer to improve drawing performance, you may have already encountered painful delays in your map display. It is always useful to analyze map display performance and address any serious issues with display performance. A primary cause of some display performance issues is related to the use of advanced display techniques to create special cartographic effects. Some map analysis results suggest using a more efficient, but cartographically less sophisticated, approach. For example, using cartographic representations for rendering may provide greater control over symbolization but may slow down map drawing. Keep in mind, when analyzing display performance for basemap layers, that basemaps compute the display once and reuse that display repeatedly during your ArcMap session. You may find that the initial delay is worth the cartographic quality that you have built into your map design. Labels computed for content in basemap layers are not cached. They are recomputed with each change in extent and may result in slow drawing performance. Consider precomputing the placement of text by using annotation to improve display performance. Basemap layers use a local display cache of content that has already been drawn to increase display performance. The cache is managed by the basemap layer and does not need to be explicitly managed in most common uses. Map navigation You can continuously pan and zoom maps that contain basemap layers and accelerated raster layers using special mouse movements as follows: Steps 1. Place your pointer anywhere in the data frame. 2. Hold down the wheel button. Initially, your pointer appears as the active pan icon—a closed hand . 3. After a few seconds, your pointer changes to the continuous pan pointer . 4. Continue to hold down the wheel button and navigate the map by dragging in the direction that you want to pan your map. In response, the map continuously pans that direction. As you pan, the pointer changes to an arrow pointing in the panning direction . 5. Press the CTRL key to speed up map panning and the SHIFT key to slow panning down. The basemap layers pan continuously and relatively smoothly while you are panning the map. The rest of the map layers are redrawn once you release the wheel button. Tip: When your map contains a basemap layer, the standard tools can be used for panning, zooming, and interacting with the map. For example, use the thumbwheel to zoom in and out. When you hold down the wheel button and begin panning immediately, the standard pan tool is used—as indicated by the closed hand pointer . An alternative to using the wheel button to enable continuous map panning is to simultaneously hold down the Qkey while navigating the pointer relative to the center of the map display (that is, if you move your pointer to the lower right of center, the map will pan in that direction). Releasing the Q key will stop map panning. You can control the panning speed based on how close you are to the center of the display. Move closer to the center to slow panning down and farther away to speed it up. Using the Q key also enables you to rotate the wheel button to zoom in and out while panning. Using hardware acceleration Basemap layers and accelerated raster layers can be used in concert with hardware acceleration to enable very high performance, continuous, smooth display as you pan and zoom your map. Turning on hardware acceleration in your ArcMap session takes advantage of your graphics card processing to further enhance performance. Hardware acceleration will not have any effect on your map if you are not using basemap or accelerated raster layers. You can turn hardware acceleration on and off on the ArcMap Options dialog box. Steps 1. Click Customize > ArcMap Options to open the ArcMap Options dialog box. 2. Click the Data View tab and check Enable hardware acceleration for supported layers. 4.6. Setting layer properties You control all aspects of a layer through the layer's properties. Some of the properties you can define include How to draw the layer What data source the layer is based on Whether to label the layer Whether to specify scale-dependent display for the layer Attribute field properties The Layer Properties dialog box will be different for different types of geographic data. For example, defining the symbology of a feature class data source will be different from a raster dataset. Using the Layer Properties dialog box, you can set the layer's properties, such as its symbology. With a group layer, you can manage the properties that apply to the whole group. Open the layer properties for each individual layer within the group layer to edit the properties of each of its layers individually. Layer properties Here is a brief description of tabs in the Layer Properties dialog box for Feature layers: General—Used to record a layer description, set credits ,and specify scale-dependent drawing properties. Source—Allows you to view the extent of your data. You can view and change the source of your data from this tab. Selection—Allows you to set how features in a specific layer are highlighted when they are selected. Selection property changes in a specific layer override the defaultSelection Options settings. Display—Controls how your data is displayed as you move in the view. Options include making a layer transparent, adding MapTips and hyperlinks, and restoring excluded features. Symbology—Provides options for assigning map symbols and rendering your data. Options include drawing all features with one symbol; using proportional symbols; using categories based on attribute values; the use of quantities, color ramps, or charts based on attributes; or the use of representation rules and symbols. Fields—Used to set characteristics about attribute fields. You can also create aliases, format numbers, and make fields invisible. An important aspect is to set Alias names for visible fields that make it easier for your users to work with feature attributes. Definition Query—Allows you to specify that a subset of your features will be used in the layer. With the Query Builder dialog box, you can create an expression to select particular features of a dataset to be used in your layer. Labels—Allows you to turn on a layer's labels, build label expressions, manage label classes, and set up the labeling options for label placement and symbology. Alternatively, you can set labeling properties for all layers within the map using the Label Manager. Joins and Relates—Allows you to join or relate attribute tables to the layer's feature attribute table. Time—Used to specify the time properties of time-aware layers. HTML Popup—Used to specify how pop-up lists are generated when you click a feature to display information about it. Caution: There are restrictions if your data source does not have an Object-ID field. This will be the case with text files (.txt files), Excel data (.xls files) and OLE DB data, such as nonregistered Oracle files accessed through OLEDB that have been added to the map as an event layer using the File > Add Data > Add XY Data or File > Add Data > Add Route Eventsfunctions. These restrictions include Layer selection properties are disabled. The layer's features can't be selected on the map in any way. You can select records in the attribute table window, including selecting an expression in the Select By Attributes dialog box accessed from the Table window, but this selection set is not reflected on the map. Definition queries can't be defined in layer properties. Operations that utilize the set of selected features can't be performed, such as navigating from the table to the map. Relates can't be defined. Relates can only be created for tables with an Object-ID column. You can relate to a table without an Object-ID field from a table with an Object-ID. In this case, the relate can be used by the identify tool to list related records. You can't push selections via the relate. With event data, the workaround is to create a feature class from the tabular data source instead of an event layer. If you are adding a table with no Object-ID field containing XY data, don't use the File > Add Data > Add XY Data command in ArcMap to create an event layer based on the table. Instead, go to ArcCatalog, right-click the table, and choose Create Feature Class from XY to create a new feature class from it. Then add that new feature class into your map. Alternatively, after using File > Add Data > Add XY Data or File > Add Data > Add Route Events functions to create an event layer from a table without an Object-ID, you can export the data to make a new layer. This will save the data to a feature class and therefore write out an Object-ID field. Another option is to use the Make_Query_Table geoprocessing tool which allows you to make the table using an OLEDB connection and to specify a column to use for the Object-ID or to dynamically add the Object-ID. Steps: 1. Right-click the layer in the table of contents and click Properties, or double-click the layer name to open the Layer Properties dialog box. 2. Click the tab containing the properties you want to modify. 3. Click OK when you are finished. Tip: When you create a layer file (.lyr), you can set layer properties in ArcCatalog by right-clicking it and clicking Properties. 3. Use the same tools for interactive panning and zooming. You should notice a smooth and responsive experience for your basemap layers and accelerated raster layers. Note: The option to enable hardware acceleration may be disabled if hardware acceleration isn't available for your current ArcMap session. This can occur if one of the following is true: Your graphics card has corrupt or out-of-date drivers or doesn’t support the functionality necessary to utilize hardware acceleration. It must meet the Shader Model 3.0 specification, and the driver software for it must meet the OpenGL 2.0 specification. You are trying to enable hardware acceleration while accessing the machine via remote desktop. You have previously accessed this machine via remote desktop while this session of ArcMap was open. Over lower-bandwidth remote desktop connections, the continuous drawing of basemap or accelerated raster layers can result in poor interactivity. By default, continuous drawing is unavailable when ArcMap is accessed over a remote desktop connection. If you have a high- bandwidth connection to the remote machine, you can enable continuous drawing so that you still get the fast refresh capabilities of your basemap or accelerated raster layers by checking the Enable continuous updates during navigation option. Dimming a basemap layer Basemap layers work just like group layers in most respects, but they do have one additional capability that's designed to help you visualize your operational data on top of your basemap layers. It's called dimming. Essentially, dimming is a way of muting the basemap layer's appearance so that you can see the layers on top of it more clearly. To dim a basemap layer, click the Adjust Dim Level command on the Effects toolbar and change the Dim Level slider in the same way that you change any other effect. By increasing the Dim Level of the basemap layer, the colors become washed out and the layer becomes partially transparent, helping your operational layers stand out more. This can be useful for visualization or editing, especially in cases where your basemap layers contain color orthographic images or other richly colored content that may obscure the details of layers on top of them. Basemap layers can be dimmed using the Dim Level slider control. Updating a basemap layer You cannot modify some layer properties while they are in the basemap layer. Only the properties available on the General and Cache (if applicable) tabs will be available. Data update operations are not available for basemap layer content when working with basemap layers. If you need to make data edits or layer updates, drag the map layer out of your basemap to edit it. Then drag the updated layer back into the basemap layer. 4.7. Displaying layers at certain scales Normally, if a layer is turned on (checked on) in the table of contents, ArcMap will draw it. However, as you zoom out, it may become difficult to see more detailed information, or as you zoom in, information may become too coarse. While you can turn off a layer, this can be inconvenient and time consuming, especially if your map contains several layers or if you change the scale frequently as you work. Layers can be set to automatically display only within an appropriate range of map scales. This is sometimes referred to as scale-dependent drawing. Here are the steps to set this up for a map layer. Setting the visible scale range Right-click the layer in the table of contents and click Properties (or double-click the layer) to open the Layer Properties dialog box. You can set a layer's visible scale range on the General tab of the Layer Properties dialog box. Specifying visible map scales can be tricky. Scales are fractions; 1:25,000 means 1/25,000th. Larger numbers typically refer to smaller map scales. Out beyond refers to the smallest desired map scale at which the layer is visible in the display (the minimum scale). This will use the larger of the map scale numbers. In beyond refers to the largest desired visible map scale, which is the smaller of the map scale numbers (the maximum scale). Once you set the range of visible map scales, whenever the scale of the data frame is outside the layer's visible scale range, the layer will not draw. You'll see a dimmed check box in the table of contents. Setting a visible scale based on the current map display You can use your map display to set the visible scale range of a map layer as follows: 1. Navigate the map until you have the desired display at the most zoomed-out map scale. 2. Right-click the layer and click Visible Scale Range. 3. Click Set Minimum Scale to set the smallest visible map scale. 4. Repeat the process to set the largest visible map scale by zooming in and clicking Set Maximum Scale. Setting the visible scale range for group layers Group layers are also a useful shortcut when you need to set visible scale ranges for more than one layer. The map can be designed for use at a number of map scales (for example, view this U.S. topographic map in your Web browser). You'll see that this map is designed to draw at over a dozen map scales (within the United States). Just like this basemap example, it often makes sense to create group layers for each scale range within a multiscale map. To do this, you can add map layers to each group layer for a map scale and set the visible scale range for each group layer. The scale range for each group layer overrides the scale range of any sublayers within the group layer. To further refine the level of detail shown within your map, you can set any of the layers within a group layer to turn on or off at scales that fall within the scale range of the group layer. Working with layers whose visible scale range has been set Here are some typical tasks for working with scale-dependent display in ArcMap. Zooming the map to make a layer visible Right-click a layer that is currently not being drawn because of the map's scale and click Zoom To Make Visible. ArcMap zooms to the nearest scale at which the layer will become visible. This command makes it easy to view a scale-dependent layer. Note: The center point of the map is maintained during this zoom. Thus, zooming doesn't necessarily mean you will see the layer's features on your map, since the desired layer may fall outside the map extent. Clearing a layer's visible scale Right-click the layer for which you want to clear a visible scale range and click Visible Scale Range > Clear Scale Range. 4.8. Displaying a subset of features in a layer When you specify a dataset that you want to draw as a map layer, you often only want to draw some of the features in the dataset. In these situations, you can define a query expression to select a subset of features for the layer display. This is referred to as a definition query. For example: You might want to display only cities with a population above a certain threshold. Many datasets, such as roads and street datasets, have subsets of features (classes), and you might want to define map layers for each class of roads independent of the other features. In another case, you might have large enterprise databases with datasets that contain millions of features across wide extents—say for a whole nation or state. Yet, in your maps, you might want to work with only a subset of that data. If you only want to display and work with a subset of features in a layer, you can apply a definition query to a layer. You can type your own expression, or you can use theQuery Builder dialog box to help you set up your query expression. When performing a query on an enterprise geodatabase feature class with both spatial and attribute components, the dialog launched by the Search order button lets you choose whether to perform the spatial search first (the default) or the attribute search first. This enables you to fine-tune how the query will be executed. This button is only present if the data source for the layer is an enterprise geodatabase feature class. Note: If the Perform the spatial search first option is selected the definition query will limit the features to those available in the extent. If the Perform the attribute search first option is selected, all attributes that match your query from the entire dataset will be selected and then the spatial search will find all those values that are visible in your extent. If your map has Data Driven Pages enabled, you can use Page Definition Queries to specify which features of a layer are drawn based on an SQL query. Though similar to other definition queries, page definition queries differ in that they only work with Data Driven Pages and are dynamic. Features are filtered based on the current page. As you iterate through the pages, the query changes and a new set of features appropriate to the new page are drawn. If you have features that overlap page extents and want these features to be displayed in multiple pages, you should consider using Clip to customize your map. This button is only present if Data Driven Pages has been defined for your map document. When Data Driven Pages is defined, it is not present in the layer properties for the layer currently being used as the index layer for Data Driven Pages. Caution: Definition queries are unavailable if you are working with a table or event layer (x,y or route) data source that does not have an ObjectID (OID) field. This will be the case with text files (.txt files); Excel data (.xls files); and OLE DB data, such as unregistered Oracle files accessed through OLE DB. With event data, the workaround is to create a feature class from the tabular data source instead of an event layer. If you are adding a table with no ObjectID field containing x,y data, don't use the File > Add Data > Add XY Data command in ArcMap to create an event layer based on the table. Instead start ArcCatalog, right-click the table, chooseCreate Feature Class from XY to create a new feature class from it, then add that new feature class into your map. Alternatively, after using File > Add Data > Add XY Data orFile > Add Data > Add Route Events functions to create an event layer from a table without an ObjectID, you can export the data to make a new layer. This saves the data to a feature class and therefore writes an ObjectID field. Another option is to use the Make Query Table geoprocessing tool, which allows you to make the table using an OLE DB connection and to specify a column to use for the ObjectID or dynamically add the ObjectID. Creating a definition query 1. Right-click the layer in the table of contents and click Properties. 2. Click the Definition Query tab on the Layer Properties dialog box. 3. Enter a query expression. Query Builder lets you create an expression to identify the particular features in the layer you want to display. 4. See Building a query expression for more information on how to build valid queries. 5. Click OK. Once you set the definition query, the map is redrawn and displays the subset of features that are selected using your query. The layer continues to be drawn with this feature subset each time the map is refreshed. To add all the features back to the layer, simply delete the definition query. 4.9. Repairing broken data links When you open a map, ArcMap looks for the data referenced by each of the layers in the map. If ArcMap can't find the data source for a particular layer, that layer won't be drawn. You can immediately tell whether a layer on your map has a broken data link because it will have a red exclamation point next to its name in the table of contents, and the check box next to the layer will be unavailable. A layer needs repairing if the data source it references has been moved, renamed, or deleted or is inaccessible for some other reason. There are a number of ways to repair broken data links, which are described in the following sections: Repairing a broken link for one layer If you only want to repair a broken link for a specific layer, click the Set Data Source button on the Source tab of the Layer Properties dialog box. This lets you specify the layer's data source by browsing to it. Select the desired data source on the Data Source dialog box, and click Add to repair the layer. When you use this button to repair a layer, the application will only repair the current layer, even if the data sources of other layers that need repairing can be found in the location of the data source you specify. Repairing broken links for multiple layers You may find that several layers in your map need repairing. For example, if a geodatabase containing data sources that are used for multiple layers in your map has been moved or renamed, all these layers will need to be repaired. If you want to repair several layers at once, right-click the layer with the broken link and click Data >Repair Data Source. You can also click the red exclamation mark to open the Set Data Source dialog box as shown here. When the repair to the data link is made from the table of contents, ArcMap repairs the selected layer using the data source you browse to and automatically repairs other broken layers if it can find their data sources in the same location of the data source you specified. Using the arcpy.mapping module to find and repair data links for a number of map documents Geoprocessing contains the arcpy.mapping module that will help you to manage your library of ArcMap documents. This set of Python functions helps you automate a number of map management and output (printing and exporting) workflows. For example, you can Create a list of maps that have layers referencing a certain data source. Update or repair the data source links of all layers in a map document. Update the data references for all the maps in a folder that reference the same geodatabase. See Geoprocessing scripts for map document management and output and Updating and Fixing Data Sources with arcpy.mapping for more information. Changing the data source when the link isn't broken If you want to change the data source used by a layer, use the Set Data Source button on the Source tab of the Layer Properties dialog box. To change the data source used by multiple layers in an ArcMap document at once, irrespective of whether or not the layers need repairing, use the Set Data Source command in ArcCatalog. You access this command by browsing to the folder in ArcCatalog where your map document is located and right-clicking the map document. This option is not available for ArcGlobe or ArcScene documents. Learn more about setting data sources What happens if I can't repair a broken layer? If you don't know the new location of the data source used by a layer that needs to be repaired, or if that data source is no longer available, you can leave the broken layer as is and continue to work with the map. The broken layer will continue to be shown in the table of contents with a red exclamation mark. If you no longer need the layer, you can remove it. 4.10. Renaming a layer By default, when you add data to a map, the resulting layer is named after its data source. You can give a layer a more meaningful name without changing the name of the data source. This will make it easier to understand which layers are on the map. Use the table of contents to change a layer's name. Alternatively, you can use the General tab on theLayer Properties dialog box to change the layer name. When you draw the features of a layer, you use the attribute values in a particular field to symbolize them. These attribute values appear by default next to the symbol in the table of contents. Since they don't usually provide a good text description of the features in your layer, you'll likely want to change them as well. The layer's description is also used when you create a legend for your map. You can use the Symbology tab on the Layer Properties dialog box to edit the feature descriptions. Steps: 1. Click the layer name or the feature description in the table of contents to change its name. A box will appear around the name, and the cursor will blink inside. You can also select an item in the table of contents and press the F2 key to rename it. 2. Type in the new name. 4.11. Viewing metadata from the Table of Contents When using a map you can see metadata describing the layer's or table's source data from the Table of Contents window. Note: This will not show the description of the layer or table as they are in the map, for example, with definition queries applied and specific fields selected for use. You'll see the description of the entire underlying dataset in the geodatabase or on disk. Steps: 1. Right-click the layer or table whose metadata you want to see. 2. Click Data > View Item Description. The Data Source Item Description dialog box opens and displays the item's metadata. 4.12. Saving layers and layer packages Saving a layer file A layer can exist outside your map as a layer file (.lyr). This makes it easy for others to access the layers you've built. You can share layers over the network and by e-mail. When users add a layer file to their maps, it will draw exactly as it was saved as long as they can get access to the data referenced by the layer. A common way that users help support this is to use relative paths to each layer's data source. When you save a layer file using either the Standard or Maplex Label Engine, that information will be stored in the layer file. If you add a layer file saved with the Maplex Label Engine to a .mxd using the Standard Label Engine, the Label Engine Warning dialog box will appear and you will decide whether to upgrade the data frame to the Maplex Label Engine. Tip: If you select the Don't warn me again ever option on the Label Engine Warning dialog box, this information is saved in a registry setting. To return the error messages later you will need to delete the registry key value HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ESRI\Desktop10.2.2\ArcMap\Settings\SkipLabelEngineCheck. Using full paths, relative paths, or UNC paths in the layer's data reference The layer file that is created will reference its data source using the Data Source Options setting that are specified for the map document. By default, this setting specifies that data sources will be referenced with their full paths. However, you can also use other conventions to record paths. See Referencing data in the map for more information. Set this property before you save your layer. Saving a layer to a previous version of ArcGIS You can save a layer and work with it in a previous version of ArcGIS. For example, you can save to ArcGIS 9.3. When saving a layer to a previous version, keep in mind that older versions of ArcGIS may be unable to access newer data sources in the current release. For example, a layer that points to an ArcGIS 10.2.2 geodatabase will not work in earlier versions of ArcGIS. Steps for saving a map layer 1. Right-click the layer name and click Save as Layer File. 2. Type in the name of your new layer file. 3. Optionally, you can choose to save a layer to a previous version of ArcMap using Save as type. 4. Click Save. Saving a layer package A layer can be saved with its data as a layer package (.lpk). A layer package includes both the layer properties and the dataset referenced by the layer. With a layer package, you can save and share everything about the layer—its symbolization, labeling, field properties, and the data. Other users will be able to add layer packages directly into their maps without having to know how to access the database or classify the data. Layer packages can be created in ArcMap, ArcGlobe, and ArcScene and can be shared between these applications, including ArcGIS Explorer. When using ArcGlobe or ArcScene, 3D properties can be added to a map layer and included in a layer package. While a layer package will be larger in size than a layer file (because it includes the data), your users will not need to worry about access to your same data sources. Packaging unsupported layers and datasets for previous versions will result in those items not opening when used by previous versions of the software. You will receive a warning for content that will not be available in previous versions of ArcGIS when packaging your layer. Layer packages support multiple versions of ArcGIS; therefore, consider the layers and data sources you are choosing to package to ensure they are available in previous versions of the software. Additionally, a layer can be saved as a schema-only layer package. This type of package allows you to share your layer design and the corresponding data model design without sharing your data. When you unpack a schema-only layer package you will be prompted to create a new geodatabase or pick an existing one, and the data model for the layers will be loaded into that geodatabase. You can then load your own datasets for the layers in that geodatabase. Tip: For a finer degree of control over how data is packaged, you can use the Package Result geoprocessing tool. For example, you can specify that only data within the current map extent is packaged or that enterprise database data is to be extracted for inclusion in the package. Caution: Though layer packages are supported from ArcGIS for Desktop version 9.3.1 onwards, schema- only layer packages are supported from ArcGIS for Desktop version 10.0 onwards. Layer packages will fail to open with older versions (9.2 or older) and schema-only layer packages will fail to open with version 9.3.1 or older. Steps for saving a data layer package 1. Right-click the layer and select Create Layer Package. The Layer Package dialog box will appear. 2. Tip: 3. You can share multiple layers in your map by selecting several layers and clicking Create Layer Package. 4. Specify where to save your layer package and give it a name—either as a file on disk or in your ArcGIS Online account for sharing. 5. You can choose to include data from an enterprise (ArcSDE) geodatabase (Include Enterprise Geodatabase data instead of referencing the data). 6. Under Item Description, provide a Summary and Tags for your layer package. 7. Specify Additional Files you want to include in the layer package. This option allows you to include other content, such as detailed documentation, reports, graphs, and so on. The following types of files are not allowed to be included in the package: .js, .vbs, .py, .pyc, .pyo, .bat, and .ocx. Also, only signed .dlls and .exes are allowed to be included. 8. You must Analyze your layer before you can save it to disk or share it at ArcGIS Online. When you run Analyze, it will validate your layer for any errors or warnings. If any issues are discovered, a Prepare window will appear with a list of the errors and warnings. Right-click each Prepare message to get more information, read help for the error, and click suggested fixes. When you run Analyze on a layer to create a layer package, your layer will be validated for any errors and warnings. If any are found, they will appear in this dialog box. 9. Click Share to create your layer package. Steps for saving a schema-only layer package The steps for creating a schema-only layer package are the same as the steps outlined above for saving a layer data package except that in step 3, you choosePackage schema only option to create a schema-only layer package. Tip: Using the Package schema only option allows you to share a layer without its data. When the layer is unpacked, you will be prompted to create the new datasets for the layers in a geodatabase. Steps for packaging 3D map layer properties Enabling 3D properties for a layer package will be important for using that layer package effectively between the different 3D visualization environments (ArcGlobe, ArcScene, and ArcGIS Explorer). The properties must be set first, then saved to a local layer file. For more information on using layers and layer packages in ArcGIS Explorer, see Working with ArcGIS layers and layer packages. 1. Start ArcGlobe or ArcScene and add the map layer (or layer package) that you created in ArcMap. 2. Set the desired 3D properties. For example, setting the height properties to extrude features in 3D, setting the distance range for a map layer's visibility in 3D, and so on. 3. Right-click the layer in ArcGlobe or ArcScene and choose Create Layer Package. 4. Follow the steps outlined above to complete the creation of a layer package. 4.13. Adding and working with query layers? What is a query layer? A query layer is a layer or stand-alone table that is defined by a SQL query. Query layers allow both spatial and nonspatial information stored in a DBMS to be easily integrated into GIS projects within ArcMap. Since query layers are using SQL to directly query database tables and views, spatial information used by a query layer is not required to be in a geodatabase. When working in ArcMap, you create query layers by defining a SQL query. The query is then run against the tables and views in a database, and the result set is added to ArcMap as a layer or stand- alone table (depending on the query). The query is executed every time the layer is displayed or used in ArcMap. This allows the latest information to be visible without making a copy or snapshot of the data and is especially useful when working with dynamic information that is frequently changing. The query layers functionality works with any of the DBMSs supported by ArcGIS. Query layers allow ArcMap to integrate data from geodatabases as well as from DBMSs. Therefore, query layers can quickly integrate spatial and nonspatial information into GIS projects independently of where and how that information is stored. A quick tour of working with Query Layers Users in ArcMap can add Query Layers to the map by defining a query against the tables and views in a DBMS. Query Layers behave like any other feature layer or stand-alone table, so they can be used to display data, used as input into a geoprocessing tool, or accessed programmatically using developer APIs. After a Query Layer has been created, it can be saved as a layer file (.lyr) or used to create a layer package (.lpk). This makes it easy to share Query Layers with other applications, map documents, and other users. Preparing to use query layers To create a query layer on a spatial database, you must complete specific tasks to ensure the query layer works with ArcGIS. You must use a release of the database management system that is supported by the ArcGIS version you are using. Check the database system requirements on the ArcGIS Resources website for information on database management system support. The query layer definition must include a unique, not-null column or combination of columns that can be used as the ObjectID in the query layer. If the data you want to use does not have such a column or combination of columns, you must add one. See Choosing a unique identifier field for more information. Depending on the type of database management system you are using, there is some configuration you must do in the database management system to use spatial types. You must install and configure database management system clients on each of the client computers from which you will create query layer connections. You can download a supported client for all databases except Netezza or Teradata from the Esri Customer Care portal. Since you must be an administrator on your computer to install software, contact your information systems department to set up your computer for query layer connections if your login is not a member of the Windows Administrator group on your computer. Some of these tasks vary depending on the type of database management system and the SQL spatial type you want to use. See the following sections for information specific to your database management system: IBM DB2 databases To use a query layer to display spatial data from a DB2 database, the database must be registered with the DB2 Spatial Extender, and the computer from which you will connect to the database must have the IBM Data Server Runtime Client for DB2 installed on it. DB2 Spatial Extender The DB2 database must be registered with DB2 Spatial Extender before you can use the ST_Geometry spatial type. Contact your GIS administrator or database administrator if you are not sure the database you are connecting to is enabled for ST_Geometry. IBM Data Server Runtime Client for DB2 Install the DB2 client application on your client computers. You can configure the clients to connect to a specific DB2 database or use a Data Source Name-less (DSN-less) connection string when connecting from ArcGIS. You can download the IBM Data Server Runtime Client for DB2 from the Esri Customer Care portal or obtain it from IBM. See the IBM DB2 documentation for information on how to install and configure a DB2 client. IBM Informix databases To use a query layer to display spatial data from an Informix database, the database must be registered with the Informix Spatial DataBlade, and the computer from which you will connect to the database must have the Informix IConnect client installed and configured on it. Informix Spatial DataBlade The Informix database you want to use must be registered with Informix Spatial DataBlade before you can use the ST_Geometry spatial type. Contact your GIS administrator or database administrator if you are not sure if the database you are connecting to is enabled for ST_Geometry. Informix IConnect Install on your client computer the Informix IConnect application and configure the Setnet32 application. Unless you will be using a DSN-less connection string to connect to Informix, you must configure an Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) connection. You can download the Informix client application from the Esri Customer Care portal or obtain it from IBM. See the IBM Informix documentation for information on installing and configuring the Informix client. Microsoft SQL Server databases Two spatial types are supported in SQL Server that you can use in your query layers: Geometry and Geography. These are present automatically in SQL Server databases; you do not have to install them. To use a query layer to display spatial data from a SQL Server database, you must install a supported version of SQL Server Native Client on your client computer. You can obtain the SQL Server Native Client from the Esri Customer Care portal or Microsoft. See the Microsoft SQL Server documentation for installing the SQL Server Native Client. Netezza data warehouse appliances To use a query layer to display spatial data from a Netezza database, you must install a Netezza spatial package. Also, you must install the Netezza ODBC driver on your ArcGIS client computer and configure a data source name. Netezza spatial package There are two packages you can use with your Netezza database: the legacy Netezza Spatial Package and the Netezza Spatial Esri Package. If you use the legacy Netezza Spatial Package, ArcGIS requires that the spatial column be named shape. If the name of the column is not shape, create a view on the table and alias the spatial column name to shape. Which spatial package you use affects how you configure the Netezza ODBC driver. Netezza ODBC driver You must install the Netezza ODBC driver and configure a data source name. You can obtain the Netezza driver from IBM. See the documentation provided by Netezza for information on installing and configuring the ODBC driver. If you use the legacy Netezza spatial package, you must set the option to Optimize for ASCII character set when setting up the ODBC data source name. If you use the Netezza Spatial Esri Package, do not set the option to Optimize for ASCII character set when configuring the ODBC data source name. Oracle databases To use a query layer to display spatial data from an Oracle database, a spatial type must be present in the database. Also, the computer from which you will connect to the database must have the Oracle client installed and configured on it. Spatial types in Oracle Two spatial types are supported in Oracle that you can use in your query layers: ST_Geometry and SDO_Geometry. The ST_Geometry spatial type is installed when you create an enterprise geodatabase in Oracle or can be installed in an Oracle database using the Create Spatial Type geoprocessing tool. You also need to configure the Oracle EXTPROC to use ST_Geometry. Your GIS administrator or database administrator can tell you if your database has been configured to use this spatial type. For information on configuring the EXTPROC, see Configuring the Oracle listener to use SQL and your Oracle documentation. Oracle Locator objects, including the SDO_Geometry type, are present by default in Oracle databases. Therefore, you can access the SDO_Geometry type without additional installations, but to access all SDO_Geometry functions, you might need to install Oracle Spatial in the database. Oracle client On your client computer install the Oracle Net application. You can obtain the Oracle Instant Client from the Esri Customer Care portal or get the Instant or full client from Oracle. For information on installing and configuring the Oracle client, see Oracle's documentation set. PostgreSQL databases To use a query layer to display spatial data from a PostgreSQL database, a spatial type must be present in the database. Also, the ArcGIS client from which you will connect to the database must have the PostgreSQL libpq files placed in its bin directory. Spatial types in PostgreSQL Two spatial types are supported in PostgreSQL that you can use in your query layers: ST_Geometry and PostGIS geometry. The ST_Geometry type is installed when you create an enterprise geodatabase in PostgreSQL or can be installed in a PostgreSQL database using the Create Spatial Type geoprocessing tool. The PostGIS geometry type must be installed separately on the PostgreSQL database server. Once installed, the database you use must be created using the PostGIS template database or must be configured to use PostGIS so that it is enabled to store the PostGIS geometry type. Contact your GIS administrator or database administrator to determine whether your database has been configured to use either of these spatial types. PostgreSQL libraries Place the PostgreSQL libpq files in the ArcGIS bin folder on your client computer. The libpq files can be downloaded from the Esri Customer Care portal. See Setting up a connection to PostgreSQL for more information. Teradata databases To use a query layer to display spatial data from a Teradata database, the computer from which you will connect to the database must have the Teradata GSS client, ICU library, and ODBC driver installed on it and a data source configured. Install the Teradata ICU library, GSS client, and ODBC driver on your ArcGIS client computer (in that order). You can obtain these files from Teradata. Next, configure a data source name for the Teradata database. See the documentation provided by Teradata for information on installing the client files and configuring a data source name. Also see Setting up a connection to Teradatafor specific options that must be set for using Teradata with ArcGIS. ArcGIS requires that the spatial column in a Teradata feature class be named shape. If the name of the column is not shape, create a view on the table and alias the spatial column name to shape. Connecting to a database from the query layer interface in ArcMap The first step in creating a query layer in ArcGIS is to make a connection to the database you want to query. You can do this from the Catalog tree, as explained in Database connections in ArcGIS for Desktop. Alternatively, you can connect from the query layer interface in ArcMap, as described below: Steps: 1. In ArcMap, click File > Add Data > Add Query Layer. The New Query Layer dialog box opens. A connection to the database must be established before building queries on the New Query Layer dialog box. 2. Click Connections. The Manage Connection(s) dialog box opens. From here, you can choose existing database connections, create new connections, and edit or delete existing connections. 3. Choose an existing connection or create a connection to a database. To create a new database connection, click New. The Database Connection dialog box opens. Provide connection information as described in Database connections in ArcGIS for Desktop. When the new connection is added to the Existing Connection(s) list, type a descriptive name for the connection and click OK. To use an existing connection, choose it from the Existing Connection(s) list and click OK. You are now connected to the database you chose, and the tables that can be used in your query layer appear in the List of Tables. You are ready to create a query layer. Creating a query layer You use the New Query Layer dialog box in ArcMap to create query layers. Before you can create a query layer, you must first make a connection to a database. TheConnection drop-down list shows available database connections. After a connection to the database is established, a list of tables and views found in that database populates the left window of the dialog box. When you select one of the tables, the columns for that table are displayed in the right window. Note: Each column in a database has a specific data type. ArcGIS can work with most common database types. However, some less common database types are not supported. If the attribute column type is Unknown, this indicates that ArcGIS does not support that data type. When you specify a query, all columns that have an unknown data type must either be excluded or changed in the query to a different data type that ArcGIS supports. To learn more about the data types that ArcGIS supports, see Data types supported in ArcGIS. You specify an SQL query in the Query text box. When building a query, a whole table can be added to the Query text box by either double-clicking it or dragging it from the List of Tables window into the Query text box. Likewise, you can add specific columns in a table to the query by double-clicking them or dragging them from the Columns window into the Query text box. You can also type specific queries or cut and paste a query from an external application into the Query text box. SQL syntax specific to the database should be used when building a query layer. A common example would be as follows: SELECT * FROM Test.dbo.US_States. This would result in a query layer containing all rows from the US_States table. In ArcMap, this would display all the United States. For more information on building SQL queries, see Building a query expression. Once the query is created, it must be validated. During validation, ArcGIS attempts to determine the properties of the query layer based on the first row returned in the table. The properties of a query layer are the following: Unique identifier field—This is one or many fields used by ArcGIS to uniquely identify the layer. Dimensionality—This determines whether a layer's coordinates will include m-values to store route data and z-values to store 3D data. Geometry type—This determines whether the layer is a point, multipoint, line, or polygon. Spatial reference—This is the coordinate system and other related spatial properties for the layer. SRID—This is the layer's spatial reference identifier and is used to ensure that only geometries with the same spatial reference identifier are returned by the query. You can view and modify these properties after a query layer has been validated by checking the Show advanced options check box and clicking Next. The properties of a query layer are used to filter the rows returned to ArcGIS from the database. For example, if you have geometries in a table that have multiple SRIDs, the SRID property set on the query layer will be used to prevent any rows in the database table that don't match that SRID from being displayed in ArcMap. Steps: 1. On the New Query Layer dialog box, specify a name in the Name text box for the query layer that will be created. This is the name that will appear in the ArcMap table of contents. 2. Enter an SQL query into the Query text box. 3. Once the query is created, it must be validated. Click Validate to make sure the query syntax is correct and returns data that can be used by ArcGIS. The validation process executes the query in the database and verifies whether the result set from the query meets the data modeling standards enforced by ArcGIS. A query layer is not added to ArcMap until it is valid. Rules for validation are as follows: The result set must have, at most, one spatial field. The result set must have, at most, one spatial reference. The result set must have only one shape type. The result set cannot have any field types not supported by ArcGIS. If the validation fails for any reason, an error message is returned so you can modify the query. Validation is especially important when working with data in spatial databases that do not enforce the same standards as ArcGIS. Tip: During the validation process, ArcGIS sets the dimensionality, geometry type, spatial reference, SRID, and unique identifier properties on the query layer. These values are based on the first row returned in the query. If you need to change these settings, you can do so through the Advanced Options dialog box. Check the Show Advanced Propertiescheck box to display the advanced options page of the New Query Layer dialog box. See Choosing a unique identifier field and Defining the spatial reference of the query layer for more information on the advanced options page. 4. If your query is successfully validated, click Finish to add the result set to ArcMap as a query layer. Note: ArcMap calculates the extent of the layer when you drag it into the map. If you are adding a table that contains a lot of features, extent calculation can take a while. If you know the extent of the data or want to use the extent of your spatial reference instead of waiting for the extent to be calculated, you can do so. Click the appropriate button on theCalculate Extent dialog box. If you click Input Extent, you must type a valid extent that includes all the features in the table. Choosing a unique identifier field for a query layer All layers in ArcMap need a unique identifier. Therefore, your query layer must contain a unique identifier. If you define a query layer on a geodatabase table or feature class, the table will always have a unique identifier field: the ObjectID field. In most cases, though, you create query layers to access feature classes and tables in a database. It is standard practice for database tables to contain a unique identifier field; therefore, your database tables will likely already contain a field you can use as a unique identifier. To be used as a unique identifier in ArcGIS, a field must be not null, contain unique values, and be one of the following data types: integer (positive values only) string GUID date Since the value in the unique identifier field uniquely identifies a row or feature object within ArcGIS, values in that field must always be unique and not null. It is your responsibility to guarantee that values in this field meet this requirement. Note: You will receive an error if ArcGIS encounters a null value, but ArcGIS does not enforce the uniqueness of values in the unique identifier field used in a query layer or database table. If ArcGIS encounters a nonunique value, no error is returned; however, you may see inconsistent results in selection sets or other queries in ArcGIS. If ArcGIS cannot detect a qualifying unique identifier, you will be prompted to choose a field or fields to use when you drag a database table into ArcMap or when you validate a new query layer definition. In this example, ArcGIS could not find an integer, not-null field to use for a unique identifier. You must choose a field or combination of fields that you know is not null and unique to be used as a unique identifier for the rows in the table. If a qualifying field is present, ArcGIS sets the first not-null field it finds as the unique identifier field by default when you drag a database table from the Catalog tree and place it in ArcMap or validate a query layer definition. This is often an adequate value to use as the unique identifier field, but you can choose another qualifying field or fields from the Unique Identifier Field(s) list to be used instead. Follow these steps to change the unique identifier fields ArcGIS uses for your database table: Steps: 1. In ArcMap, right-click the layer in the Table of Contents and click Properties. 2. Click the Source tab and click Change Query. The Edit Query Layer dialog box opens. 3. Click Show advanced options and click Next. 4. Choose a different qualifying field or set of fields to be used as the unique identifier and click Finish. 5. Click OK to close the Layer Properties dialog box. Defining the spatial reference of the query layer Manually defining the spatial reference of a query layer ArcGIS uses the spatial reference identifier (SRID) specified on the shape values in the database to determine the spatial reference of the features being returned by a query layer. There may be instances where ArcGIS cannot accurately determine the spatial reference based on the current SRID value set on those features in the database. In these cases, the query layer will have an unknown spatial reference. It is possible to manually define the spatial reference on the query layer on the Advanced Options dialog box. It is important to note that this does not reproject the query layer; it just defines what spatial reference should be used when mapping the results of the query within ArcGIS. 1. Check the Advanced Options check box on the New Query Layer dialog box. 2. Click Select to choose the coordinate system to be used for the spatial reference. 3. Optionally, you can import the spatial reference from an existing dataset by clicking Import. Geometry SRID property This property is the spatial reference identification value that is set on the shape objects in the database. It will be blank if the query layer does not have a spatial field. If this value is set, all features that do not have the specified geometry SRID values will be excluded from the result set. Modifying a query layer Once added to ArcMap, the query and other properties that define the query layer can be modified. This is done by opening the Edit Query Layer dialog box, which can be opened from the Layer Properties dialog box. When a spatial table stored in a database is added to ArcMap, it creates a query layer with default properties as determined by the first row in the table. These properties may not be ideal, however. For example, a spatial table may have multiple geometry types for a single spatial attribute. A spatial table containing a collection of cities can be modeled in the database as both a point and a polygon geometry type. Feature layers in ArcGIS can only have a single geometry type, so the first row in the table provides the default geometry type property. In this example, if the first row in the spatial table containing cities data returns a point geometry, the feature layer for cities will be a point geometry type. If you would prefer to view the cities as polygons, you can modify the query layer properties from the Edit Query Layer dialog box and change the geometry type to polygon. Other properties, such as a query layer's dimensionality, spatial reference, SRID, and unique identifier field, are also determined by the first row returned from the spatial table. Similar to the geometry type, you can access these properties in the advanced options panel of the Edit Query Layer dialog box and modify them. When you change the dimensionality of the query layer, the geometry field value of the displayed features are modified to match that change. For example, for a layer that is defined with x, y, z, and m dimensionality in the database, if you edit the query layer by unchecking the Coordinates include M values andCoordinates include Z values options in the advanced options, all the features in the layer will display only the x and y values. Alternatively, if the layer is defined with only x and y dimensionality (Coordinates include M values and Coordinates include Z values options are unchecked), you can modify the query layer to include m and z values by checking these options, and all the features will display x, y, z, and m values. If a feature does not contain a z or m value in the database, those values will appear as null in the query layer. When you change the spatial reference or SRID of the query layer in the advanced options of the Edit Query Layer dialog box, the features displayed in ArcMap are filtered based on that spatial reference or SRID value. Steps: 1. In the table of contents, right-click the query layer whose query you would like to modify. 2. Click Properties to open the Layer Properties dialog box. 3. Click the Source tab. 4. Click Change Query. 5. If you want to change the SQL statement that defines the query layer, modify the query in the Query text box. See Building a query expression for more information on writing an SQL query in ArcGIS. 6. Click Validate to make sure that the query expression is correct. 7. If you would like to modify any of the spatial properties of the query layer, such as its dimensionality, SRID, spatial reference, or geometry type, you can click the Show advanced options check box and click Next. See Creating a query layer for more information on advanced options. 8. Click Finish to close the dialog box. 9. On the Layer Properties dialog box, click OK to display the new result set for the query layer and close the dialog box. Exporting a query layer You can persist a query layer by exporting it to a feature class. The feature class can then be shared easily between geodatabases via copy/paste. Steps: 1. In ArcMap, right-click on a query layer in the Table of Contents. 2. Click Data > Export Data. 3. In the Export Data dialog box, select whether you want to export all features or all features in the view extent using the Export drop-down menu. 4. Determine the spatial reference to use for the new feature class by clicking one of the radio buttons. You can choose to use the coordinate system from the layer's source data, from the data frame, or from the feature dataset that you are exporting the new feature class into. If you choose to use the coordinate system from a feature dataset, you must first browse to the appropriate feature dataset in the Output feature class text box. 5. In the Output feature class text box, browse to the location you would like to export the new feature class to and enter an appropriate name. 6. Click OK. 5. Interacting with layer contents 5.1.Identifying features When you want to view attribute values for a feature, use the Identify tool that can be accessed from the Tools toolbar. Here are the steps: 1. Click the Identify tool on the Tools toolbar. Alternatively, you can access Identify by right- clicking and selecting Identify from the context menu: Within the data frame In a result listed on the Find dialog box On a record in the Table window 2. Click on a location in your data frame to identify the features at the location. The attributes are presented in the Identify window. 3. Alternatively, you can create a box to identify a group of features. Click on a location in your data frame, then drag to create a box. You can also hold down the SHIFTkey while clicking on the map to identify multiple features. Working with results in the Identify window When you click on a feature with the Identify tool, the Identify window lists the feature(s) at the identify location. You can click a feature in the feature list and see its attributes in the bottom panel. You can also right-click a feature to navigate to it, select it for other operations, define hyperlinks for it, and so on. Note: Feature geometry is needed to use the Flash, Zoom To, Pan To, and Create Bookmark commands. In some cases, feature geometry is not available, so these commands are unavailable. These cases include the identification of features from any WMS layer and features from an ArcIMS image service that does not include geometry in any query results. Identify results use a display expression for the layer if one has been defined on the Display tab on the Layer Properties dialog box. Choosing which layers to identify By targeting layers to identify, you can focus on what is relevant when exploring a map. The Identify tool can be customized to narrow down the amount of data you see by either filtering the layers you are interested in or customizing the field properties of those layers. When you use the Identify tool, it identifies the topmost layer in your map by default. Use the Identify from list at the top of the Identify window to choose the specific layer(s) to identify. You can use the following options: Topmost layer—Identifies the attributes of the feature or features from the layer that is highest in the table of contents drawing order and currently visible. This option doesn't identify features in a layer that is turned off in the table of contents or currently not being drawn because of the scale of the map. With this setting, you usually get the attributes of the feature you click on without getting the attributes of features in other layers that are drawn underneath that feature. Visible layers—Identifies the attributes of the features that are currently visible in your map. Selectable layers—Identifies the attributes of the features belonging to selectable layers. You can manage the list of selectable layers in the table of contents List by Selection view. All layers—Identify displays feature attributes for all map layers in the data frame regardless of whether they are in the display. A layer—Select a specific layer in your map. If you choose a particular layer, its features are identifiable even if the layer is currently turned off in the table of contents or currently not being drawn because of the scale of the map. Tip: Why does Identify let you identify a feature that's not drawn on the map? This is because in some situations you might want to be able to access a layer's attributes without drawing its features. For example, you may want to be able to find out what ZIP Code a particular street segment is located in without drawing the ZIP Code boundaries on your street map. In this case, you would choose the ZIP Code layer from the drop-down list but turn this layer off in the table of contents. Clicking on a street with the Identify tool gives you the attributes of the ZIP Code layer at the location you clicked. Customizing field properties and their display Identify uses the column properties that you manage in the Table window in ArcMap. For example, you can specify alias names for fields that will be used instead of the often-cryptic DBMS field names, or you can hide the display of some columns. This setting also hides their display in the identify results. You can also right-click in the attribute display panel to get a context menu of additional tools to work with feature attributes. For example, you can sort and hide fields in the Identify display, as well as copy field names and values and paste them as tab-delimited text into other applications such as e-mail or Microsoft Excel. Learn more about field properties aliases and table display options and setting these properties using the Fields tab. Steps for setting the Selection tolerance 1. Click Selection > Selection Options on the main menu. The Selection Options dialog box opens. 2. Specify the number of pixels you want to use as your selection tolerance when selecting features. A value of 3 to 5 pixels usually works well. A pixel count that is too small can be frustrating because it will be hard to precisely position and select features. However, too large of a pixel radius will result in inaccurate selections. Selection will not necessarily find the feature closest to the cursor; it returns the first feature in the dataset that is within the tolerance. Changing the location units The Identify window includes a display of the geographic coordinates of the location you identify. You can set your preferred units from the drop-down list. Viewing feature class attachments Pictures, documents, and other information can be added to a feature class as attachments. These attachments are included automatically as part of the identify results if the identified feature includes attachments. In the Identify results panel, you see the following: Click the paper clip to view the attachments. Viewing related data If you want to display related data using the field properties (primary display field, field aliases, field visibility, and number formatting) of the table or layer that represents that related data in your map, right-click any entry in the tree on the left side of the Identify window and click Show Relates With Field Properties. If you access related data while this option is on and the related data is not in your map, the fields are listed in the usual way because there are no field properties available for Identify to use. If multiple layers represent the related data, you can choose which one to use to view the related data. This setting is stored in the registry, so it is the default behavior every time you use the Identify tool. Simply uncheck the context menu command to turn it off again. 5.2. Setting HTML pop-up properties for feature layers Many map layers in ArcGIS are used for accessing rich attributes and other information for each feature. One mechanism is to provide an HTML pop-up display when you click on each feature. This potentially provides a powerful way to share HTML-formatted information, such as web content, about each feature. HTML pop-up windows enable users to access formatted content, including web-based content, such as graphics referenced by URLs, by clicking on features on the map. They are especially useful for layers that you will be sharing with other users as packages so that they can access richly formatted information about features when they open your package in ArcGIS for Desktop or ArcGIS Explorer Desktop. They are also used if you share your data with others as KML. Finally, the HTML pop-up definition is also served with your map if you serve it using ArcGIS for Server, and they can be accessed by people using your map service in certain web applications and desktop clients such as ArcGIS for Desktop and ArcGIS Explorer. You can display HTML content about features in ArcMap, ArcGlobe, or ArcScene using HTML pop-up windows. To do this, you'll first set the HTML display properties for a feature layer. Once you have defined what to display, you can click a feature with the HTML Pop-up tool to open a window containing the HTML content. HTML pop-up windows work much like the Identify tool, except the information display can be formatted in HTML. Setting the properties of an HTML pop-up display You use the Layer Properties dialog box to define HTML pop-up properties for a layer. Follow these steps: 1. Right-click the layer to open the Layer Properties dialog box and click the HTML Popup tab. 2. Check the Show content for this layer using the HTML Popup tool check box. 3. Choose the option for the type of HTML display you would like to use. You have three options as shown here: 4. The next section has more information on setting each option. 5. Check the Display coded value description in all HTML content check box if you want the attribute values that are based on coded value domains to be displayed in HTML pop-up windows with their full description, such as 'Wide plastic pipeline' instead of their coded value. 6. To verify that your HTML content will display as you want it to, click the Verify button. Types of HTML content you can display As a table of the visible fields The default HTML pop-up window for a feature layer has an HTML table containing the names and values of the layer's attributes (below). You can set your field visibility, the order in which fields appear, field alias names, and other properties on the Fields tab of the Layer Properties dialog box. Using a display expression—As part of using visible fields, you can optionally build a display expression that will be used in your HTML pop-up window. For example, you can build a display expression for counties that include the county name, state name, and population from fields in your feature attribute table. This display also includes three visible fields—POPDENSITY, MALE, and FEMALE—which are displayed using their field aliases. Use the Display tab on your Layer Properties dialog box to build the display expression. Click the Expression button to display the Display Expression dialog box and create a display expression. Including feature class attachments—When using the option to display HTML pop-up windows as a table of visible fields, feature class attachments will be displayed automatically as part of the pop- up window. For example, a number of pictures, documents, and other attachments can be added to a feature class. These attachments will be included as part of the HTML pop-up window. Displaying images from file paths—If you have a field in your layer's attribute table that contains file paths to images, you can modify the value of the field so that the image automatically displays in the pop-up. You can do this by using the HTML image tag: <img src='C:\DATA\Images\PICTURE1.jpg' width='250' /> As a URL HTML pop-up windows can display the contents of a URL accessed over the Internet. The most common use of URLs is to reference HTML pages. The attribute value supplied from one of the layer's attributes becomes part of the URL expression. In the example below, this option is used to specify that the pop-up window will contain the Wikipedia entry for a place-name supplied by the attribute field. The city name value is returned as a property when a user clicks on a feature in the map display using the HTML Popup tool. This city name field is one of the HTML pop-up properties that you would set for the city layer. When using this option, you can think of it as being like you would build an expression. The expression in this case is simple: Prefix + Field + Suffix = Complete URL. Example 1: If you defined the prefix as http://training.esri.com/gateway/index.cfm?fa= and selected a field with an example value of catalog.gateway, the HTML Pop-up tool would combine the prefix with the field value to create the URL http://training.esri.com/gateway/index.cfm?fa=catalog.gateway. No Suffix in this example is required to complete the URL. Example 2: If you defined the prefix as http://training.esri.com/gateway and selected a field with an example value of index, you would also need a suffix to complete this URL. For this URL, the suffix is .cfm. The complete URL would be http://training.esri.com/gateway/index.cfm. As a custom pop-up window This option is a formatted page based on an Extensible Style Language (XSL) template. The pop-up window is loaded with HTML content based on the format of an XSL template. HTML formatting stored as attributes in the layer is used when the values from the attribute are displayed in the pop- up window. This advanced option allows you to create customized HTML content, such as a pop-up window containing images, hyperlinks, and videos. For XSL template examples, refer to the HTMLPopup folder in the <install drive>:\Program Files\ArcGIS\Desktop10.2\Styles directory. Publishing HTML pop-up windows to ArcGIS Explorer You can use layer packages as a way to publish HTML pop-up windows for layers to ArcGIS Explorer. 5.4. Selecting features interactively Selecting features allows you to identify or work with a subset of features on your map. You'll most likely work with selected features when you are querying, exploring, analyzing, or editing data. Applying a selection lets you specify the features you want to calculate statistics for, view attributes for, or edit or define the set of features that comprise a map layer. There are several ways you can select features. You can select features with your mouse pointer by clicking them one at a time or by dragging a box around them on the map. There are two main ways to select features interactively on the map: Use the Select Features tool on the Tools toolbar. Select their records in the Table or Graph window with your mouse pointer. As you are selecting, the number of features selected is shown immediately in the lower left corner of the ArcMap window after you make the selection. It's also shown after the layer name on the List By Selection view in the table of contents. To add features to an existing selection, hold down the SHIFT key while you select features. To remove one or more features from a selection of multiple features, hold downSHIFT and click the features. To deselect all selected features at once, click the map where there are no features, click a feature of a layer that is not selectable, or click the Clear Selected Features tool on the Tools toolbar. Preparing to select features Interactive feature selection involves digitizing a shape to select a set of features that overlap the shape. Before you begin to select features, you should do the following: 1. Set the list of selectable layers. You can set and manage the list of selectable layers in the table of contents List By Selection view. 2. Specify how the shapes that you digitize will be used to select features. You have three options: Select features that overlap the selection shape wholly or partially. Select features that are completely contained by the selection shape. Select the features that completely contain the graphic selection shape. Set this option by clicking Selection > Selection Options from the main menu. 3. Set other selection options on this dialog box, such as the selection color and warnings on the number of features in selection results. 4. Specify if you want to select a new set of features or modify the existing set of selected features. You can do the following: Create a new selected set of features. Add to the current selected set. Remove features from the current selected set. Select features from the current selected set. Click Selection > Interactive Selection Method and choose the desired option. Selecting features Once you have set up your selection options, you can select features using the following steps: 1. Click the Select Features arrow on the Tools toolbar and set the selection option. 2. Digitize the selection shape in your data frame. The set of selected features is highlighted in the selection color, such as the selected features shown in blue below. Switching features in your selection You can use the Switch Selection command to unselect all the selected features and select all the unselected ones. Right-click a layer in the table of contents and clickSelection > Switch Selection. Additional feature selection methods In addition to selecting features graphically in the map, you can select features using a number of additional options: Selecting features using an attribute query You can select features that match a query expression using the Select By Attributes tool. Selecting features using the feature attribute table When you are working with the feature attributes of a layer , you can select records in the feature attribute table by clicking to the left of a record. Whenever you have selected rows in your feature table, you can right-click on any selected row and choose Select/Unselect. Tip: To select consecutive records in a table, click and drag the mouse pointer up or down, or select the record at the top of the set you want to select, hold down SHIFT, then select the record at the end of the set. You can select records that are not consecutive and unselect features by holding down the CTRL key as you click the feature. Selecting features using another layer You can select features in one layer that overlap or touch features in another layer using the Select By Location tool. This allows you to overlay features from a selection layer and use these to identify features that overlap these selection features. See Using Select By Location for more information. Selecting features while editing When editing, you can also select features using special edit selection tools. See Selecting features while editing for more information. Steps for setting the Selection tolerance 1. Click Selection > Selection Options on the main menu. The Selection Options dialog box opens. 2. Specify the number of pixels you want to use as your selection tolerance when selecting features. A value of 3 to 5 pixels usually works well. A pixel count that is too small can be frustrating because it will be hard to precisely position and select features. However, too large of a pixel radius will result in inaccurate selections. Selection will not necessarily find the feature closest to the cursor; it returns the first feature in the dataset that is within the tolerance. 5.6. Using Select By Attributes One of the selection methods you can use to select features in a layer is to select features using an attribute query. This is performed using the Select By Attributes tool, which is described here. Select By Attributes allows you to provide a SQL query expression that is used to select features that match the selection criteria. Steps for using Select By Attributes 1. Click Selection > Select By Attributes to open the Select By Attributes dialog box. 2. Choose the layer to perform the selection against. 3. Specify the selection method. 4. Enter a query expression using one of the following methods: Create a query using the expression building tools. Type a query into the selection window. Load a query saved to disk. See Building a query expression for information on the syntax of a query. Tip: Click Unique Values to see the values for the selected field when creating a query expression. You can type a value in the Go To input box to quickly navigate this list. 5. Validate your query expression by clicking Verify. 6. Click OK or Apply to execute your selection expression and work with the selection results. 7. Optionally, you can save your query expression for later reuse before closing this dialog box. Field display options in the Select By Attributes dialog box A button on the right side of the Select By Attributes dialog box lets you choose how fields will be listed. Viewing field aliases in the list can be helpful, because they can make cryptic field names more understandable and long ArcSDE field names more manageable. Choosing to show aliases on this dialog box will not affect the expression syntax. Field aliases will not be shown or supported in the expression itself. If you double-click a field alias, it will still be added into the expression with its actual field name and any required [ ] field delimiters. In the example shown below, the field list shows the alias Depth last recorded (cm), which has been added into the expression as the field name DEPTH_BURI. Other options on this menu allow you to choose how the fields are sorted in the list. By default, the fields are still listed in their order in the data source. Choosing Sort Ascending or Sort Descending can make it easier to quickly locate the field you want. 5.7. Using Select By Graphics The Select By Graphics command allows you to select features (from all selectable layers) that intersect a selected graphic element. To use this function, select one or more graphic elements with the Select Elements tool . The Select By Graphics command on the Selection menu will then be enabled. Steps for using Select By Graphics 1. If you do not already have graphics in your map, create them using the Draw toolbar. 2. Select the graphics to be used for feature selection by clicking each graphic. 3. Click Selection > Select By Graphics to select features that intersect your graphics. This will select features from the selectable layers using the graphics that you have highlighted. Alternative method for selecting features using graphics The Tools toolbar in ArcMap also contains an alternative tool for graphically selecting features . The Select Features tool works on a single graphic that you interactively digitize as part of the selection process. Also, this tool does not add a graphic to your map display. 5.8. Working with selected features ArcMap includes a Selection menu that can be used to work with selected features. In addition, there are many other tools for working with selection results (such as viewing a selection in tables and graphs). This topic provides an overview of many of the operations you can use to work with selection results. Working with the main Selection menu Click Selection on the main menu to see various commands for working with selected features. In addition to selecting features using various choices and setting selection options, you can work with selected features on this menu—for example: Zoom to selected features. Pan the map at the current map scale to selected features. Calculate summary statistics for field values of selected features. Clear the currently selected features. Exporting selected records as a dataset You can export selected features as a new dataset for a specific layer by right-clicking the layer name in the table of contents and clicking Data > Export Data. This displays the Export Data dialog box. You can choose to export the complete data source or only the selected features. Using selections in tables and graphs Selecting features in your map simultaneously highlights corresponding rows in the table view and in graphs. See Adding and viewing tables in ArcMap for more information about working with tables. You can also work with graphs and view selected features in them. Working with selections in the Layer shortcut menu You can work with selected features for a specific layer by right-clicking the layer name in the table of contents and clicking Selection. This displays the shortcut menu of various operations you can apply to the selection set of a layer. Follow these steps to use the Selection shortcut menu and create a layer from selected features: 1. Select the desired features for a layer. 2. Right-click the layer and click Selection on the shortcut menu. 3. Click the desired operation on the menu. For example, click Create Layer from Selected Features to create a new selection layer. This adds a new layer at the top of the table of contents. The new layer name is the original layer's name with the word selection added to the name (for example, TX_counties selection). Caution: In this example, the layer that is created from selected features is only useful as a temporary working dataset (for example, for use as input into a geoprocessing model). The new layer makes a list of the FeatureIDs (FIDs) or ObjectIDs (OIDs) of the selected features and will become invalid when the original data source is updated or changed. 5.9. Setting the Selection tolerance A number of tools are used to interactively select features in your map documents: Interactive feature selection Select for editing Identify Hyperlink HTML pop-ups They rely on a selection tolerance to select the desired feature when it is within a number of pixels of the cursor location. Steps for setting the Selection tolerance 1. Click Selection > Selection Options on the main menu. The Selection Options dialog box opens. 2. Specify the number of pixels you want to use as your selection tolerance when selecting features. A value of 3 to 5 pixels usually works well. A pixel count that is too small can be frustrating because it will be hard to precisely position and select features. However, too large of a pixel radius will result in inaccurate selections. Selection will not necessarily find the feature closest to the cursor; it returns the first feature in the dataset that is within the tolerance. 5.10. Feature editing using layers Layers are used for all types of feature editing in ArcMap—for example, to add and modify features; update their attributes; use special tools to snap, extend, or clip feature geometries; use special data entry tools; and perform rich attribute editing. Editing in ArcMap is done within the framework of a map document and its layers. Each feature layer references a feature class and can be used to define feature templates used in editing. See A quick tour of editing to learn more about editing in ArcMap. 5.11. Measuring distances and areas The Measure tool lets you measure lines and areas on the map. You can use this tool to draw a line or polygon on the map and get its length or area, or you can click directly on a feature and get measurement information. Click the Measure tool on the Tools toolbar to open the Measure dialog box. The Measure dialog box allows you to set different options for how you measure—including whether to measure lines, areas, or features—and to set which units are reported. Measurements are displayed on the dialog box, so it is easy to copy and paste them into other applications. The Measure dialog box contains tools for measuring distance and features. By default, the Measure Line tool is enabled until you choose a different option. The tools on the Measure dialog box are listed below: Measure Line—Double-click to complete the line. Measure An Area—Double-click to complete the polygon. (This is unavailable if your data frame is not using a projected coordinate system.) Measure A Feature—Click a feature to measure its length (line), perimeter and area (polygon or annotation), or x,y location (point features). Polygon feature measurement is unavailable if your data frame is not using a projected coordinate system. Show Total—Keep a sum of consecutive measurements. Choose Units—Set the distance and area measurement units. The measurement units are set to the map units by default. Clear and Reset Results—Clear and reset the measurement results. Choose Measurement Type—Set the measurement type for measuring line distances. Planar is the default when working in a projected coordinate system. Geodesic is the default when working in a geographic coordinate system. Interactive measurement You can sketch lines and areas on the map over your display and return their measurements. Here are the steps to measure length and areas using map graphics: Steps 1. Click the Measure tool on the Tools toolbar. 2. Click the Measure A Line button or the Measure An Area button . 3. Sketch the desired shape on your map. 4. Double-click when you want to end the line or polygon, and the measurements are displayed on the Measure dialog box. Measuring features You can select features and return their lengths and areas. You can also use the Show Total tool to sum the measurements for a series of features. Steps 1. Click the Measure tool on the Tools toolbar. 2. Click the Measure A Feature button . 3. Click on a feature to see its measurements. If you also use Show Total , click on a series of features to see each individual measurement as well as the running total for all features. Tip: The Calculate Geometry command, which is accessed from the table window, will calculate lengths, areas, x,y coordinates, and so on, and place the values into a field in the attribute table. To learn more about Calculate Geometry, see Calculating area, length, and other geometric properties. Measurement types available with the Measure tool The Choose Measurement Type drop-down list provides a selection of measurement types to use for distance measurement. Measurement types available include Planar,Geodesic, Loxodrome, and Great Elliptic. Measurement type of the measure tool Planar Planar measurement use 2D Cartesian mathematics to calculate lengths and areas. This option is only available when measuring in a projected coordinate system and the 2D plane of that coordinate system will be used as the basis for the measurements. All area measurements calculated with the measure tool are planar. Geodesic The shortest line between any two points on the earth's surface on a spheroid (ellipsoid). One use for a geodesic line is when you want to determine the shortest distance between two cities for an airplane's flight path. This is also known as a great circle line if based on a sphere rather than an ellipsoid. Loxodrome A loxodrome is not the shortest distance between two points but instead defines the line of constant bearing, or azimuth. Great circle routes are often broken into a series of loxodromes, which simplifies navigation. This is also known as a rhumb line. Great Elliptic The line on a spheroid (ellipsoid) defined by the intersection at the surface by a plane that passes through the center of the spheroid and the start and endpoints of a segment. This is also known as a great circle when a sphere is used. The great elliptic type allows you to create lines only. When measuring in a data frame with a projected coordinate system, the default measurement type will be Planar. This means that 2D Cartesian mathematics are used to calculate lengths. Planar measurements reflect the projection of geographic data onto the 2D surface (in other words, they will not take into account the curvature of the earth). Geodesic, Loxodrome, and Great Elliptic measurement types may be chosen as an alternative if desired. When measuring in a data frame with a geographic coordinate system, the default measurement type is Geodesic. Planar line measurements and all area measurements will be unavailable when measuring in a geographic coordinate system. Loxodrome and Great Elliptic measurement types may be chosen as an alternative if desired. Using snapping The Measure tool uses snapping in ArcMap—the cursor will snap to features, edges, and coordinates that you have specified in your snapping settings. When you place your pointer on your map document and begin to enter coordinates, your snapping settings will be used. To learn more about snapping, see About snapping. Tip: When you use the Measure tool in snapping mode, it is easy to trace over features, such as to measure the distance between street intersections. If you want to snap to edges (the parts of lines where there is no vertex, such as the edge of a parcel with straight sides), hold down CTRL when measuring. To turn of snapping temporarily, hold down theSPACEBAR key. 5.12. Using the Find tool The Find tool allows you to search for locations using an address or place-name, to find features that match particular attribute values, and to find locations using linear referencing. For example, if you are trying to find Afghanistan on a map of the world, you can enter Afghanistan or just Afgh in the Find tool, and you'll get a list of the features from layers in your map that contain that search string in any of their attributes. Click the Find tool on the Tools toolbar. The Find dialog box appears. You can use the Find tool to generate a list of matches. Once the results of Find are displayed, you can navigate to each feature. Click an entry in the results list to flash it on the map (if it is within your map extent); double-click to pan to it (center the map on its location); or right-click to access a shortcut menu of many operations you can apply to your Find results—for example, to add a graphic marker or callout label at the place, create a spatial bookmark, or add it to a list of your favorite places. If you have selected multiple entries in the list, all the context menu commands work on the selected items. Using the Geocoding toolbar—An alternative way to find addresses and place-names is to use the Geocoding toolbar. Finding features You can use attribute values to find features whose attributes match your specified value. Steps 1. Click the Find tool to open the Find dialog box and click the Features tab. 2. Enter the value you wish to find. For text searches, you can specify a subset of characters in your search. For example, Dall will find matches such as Dallas, Kendall, and Dallam. 3. Identify the layer(s) to be used in your search and whether or not all fields or a specific field will be used. 4. Optionally, check the Find features that are similar to or contain the search string check box. When checked, the searching capabilities of the Find operation will use a LIKE operator rather than an EQUALS operator. This is useful when you don't know a specific spelling or want to enter a much longer or complete find text string. This option works only with fields defined as text or strings. 5. Optionally, specify a field to search. 6. Click the Find button to find and work with the results. Finding locations You can use Find to find address and place-name locations. Note: If you are using the default locator service from ArcGIS Online or another locator service on the Web, you will need an Internet connection to use the Find tool. Steps 1. Click the Find tool to open the Find dialog box and click the Locations tab. 2. Identify the locator you want to use. By default, the ArcGIS Online locator will be used. 3. Often, however, organizations will create and use their own locators for their specific area of interest as well as to ensure that the most up-to-date, trusted information is included in their locator. 4. Enter the place-name or address that you want to find. 5. Click the Find button to search for and work with the results. Linear referencing You can use the Find tool to locate events and observations with linear referencing onto line features. Linear referencing is the method of storing geographic locations by using relative positions along measured linear features. Using Find, you can find locations expressed as measures along these networks—for example, to find scenarios like the following: Find the point location of measure 12 along a route. Locate the point 4 units east of measure marker 10 along a route. The observation starts at measurement 18 and ends at 26. The line starts at measurement 28 and continues for 12 units. Refer to Finding a route location for the steps to use Find for linear referencing. 5.13. Displaying MapTips MapTips provide an additional way to present information about map features by providing interactive access to data via the map. MapTips pop up as you hover the pointer on a feature, providing a quick way to see the name of that feature or a particular piece of information without having to use theIdentify tool or HTML pop-up windows. ArcMap lets you choose which attribute field you want to display as your MapTip. Note: MapTips will only work in data view. Steps: 1. Right-click the layer for which you want to display MapTips in the table of contents and click Properties. 2. Click the Display tab and check Show MapTips using the display expression. 3. Choose your desired display field and, optionally, specify a display expression. 4. Click OK. 5. In data view, pause the mouse pointer on a feature to see its MapTip. Tip: For raster layers rendered using the RGB Composite renderer, the MapTip displays the RGB band combination at each pixel location. If you can't see MapTips even after you've enabled them, make sure that the layer is turned on and the features in the layer are not hidden by features in overlapping layers. To increase display performance, ensure your layer has a spatial index. 5.14. Using Hyperlinks Hyperlinks allow you to access documents or web pages related to features. These hyperlinks can be accessed for each feature using the Hyperlink tool on the Toolstoolbar. This topic describes how to set and use hyperlink properties for a map layer. Hyperlinks have to be defined before you use the Hyperlink tool, and they can be one of three types: Document—When you click a feature with the Hyperlink tool, a document or file is opened using its appropriate application (such as Microsoft Excel). URL—When you click a feature with the Hyperlink tool, a web page is launched in your web browser. Script—When you click a feature with the Hyperlink tool, a feature value is sent to a script. This option enables the use of customized behavior. You can define a hyperlink for the features in a layer either by using field-based hyperlinks or defining a dynamic hyperlink using the Identify tool. Note: An alternative, and often more flexible, tool is available that uses HTML pop-ups. Clicking features reports additional information and attributes using HTML and web methods. Defining field-based hyperlink properties 1. Right-click the layer for which you want to set hyperlink properties and choose Properties. 2. Select the Display tab on the Layer Properties dialog box. 3. Check Support Hyperlinks using field. 4. Note: 5. The hyperlink field has to be set up before you can specify hyperlinks in this dialog box. For example, if you want particular web pages to be launched whenever a feature is clicked with the Hyperlink tool, you would first add a text field to the attribute table of this layer to contain the URLs associated with each feature. Then in this dialog box, you would check the hyperlink option, choose the field from the drop-down list of fields, and choose the URL radio button option. 6. The values of the field that you choose to provide hyperlinks can include the full path to the target document or the full URL of the target web page. Alternatively, the value may just contain the name of the target document or web page, and you can use the Hyperlink Base property to specify the path or URL where the target can be found. 7. You can omit the http:// part of the URL. If you want to use a different protocol than http, you must include the protocol at the beginning of the URL. 8. Select the field name you wish to use for your hyperlink and the link type—Document, URL, or Script. If you choose to use a script, use the Edit button to write your script using JScript or VBScript. Click OK. 9. Note: 10. This dialog box lets you build a script that will launch a hyperlink. The script should be coded using the rules of the scripting language selected in the Parser drop-down list. The script can include any valid statements supported by the selected scripting language. 11. Fields are enclosed in square brackets [ ], irrespective of the data type of the layer's data source. The hyperlink script is written as a function, which can contain programming logic and multiple lines of code. 12. The default functions utilize the ShellExecute function, which is part of the MSDN library. 13. Microsoft ShellExecute Function ReferenceMicrosoft VBScript Language ReferenceMicrosoft JScript Language ReferencePython Language Reference 14. These links point at web pages created, owned, and maintained by Microsoft Corporation and Python Software Foundation. We cannot guarantee the availability of these pages and are not responsible for the content found on them. 15. Click OK or Apply on the Layer Properties dialog box. Defining dynamic hyperlinks through Identify results You can dynamically add a hyperlink to a feature using the Identify tool . With dynamic hyperlinks, you do not use an attribute field to supply the hyperlink targets. The hyperlink target you specify is associated with the identified feature. This association is stored with your layer. They are also stored with your layer if you save the layer to a file. 1. Click the Identify tool on the Tools toolbar. 2. Click the feature for which you want to define a hyperlink. 3. Right-click the feature in the Identify window and click Add Hyperlink. 4. Specify the desired hyperlink target. Note: The Hyperlink Base setting has no effect on dynamic hyperlinks. You can specify any number of dynamic hyperlinks for any feature. All the dynamic hyperlinks defined for a feature are listed in the Hyperlinks pull-right list in the identify results context menu (steps 1–3 above). Also available from this menu is Manage Hyperlinks. Here, you can add and remove dynamic hyperlinks for this feature. This list does not include field-based hyperlinks, and the commands available have no effect on field-based hyperlinks. Caution: After deleting features from a shapefile, you may find that dynamic hyperlinks are attached to different features. This occurs because ArcMap uses the feature ID (FID) field to associate dynamic hyperlinks with features, but the FIDs of shapefiles must be recalculated when features are deleted. To ensure hyperlinks are always associated with the proper features, only use dynamic hyperlinks with geodatabase features classes (geodatabase features always have unique ID values). Field- based hyperlinks can be used with shapefiles without this limitation. Using hyperlinks 1. On the Tools toolbar, click the Hyperlink tool . This transforms your mouse pointer into a lightning bolt. Note: Any visible features in the map that have hyperlinks defined are drawn in blue, the default color, or outlined in blue in the case of polygons. When you hover the pointer over a feature for which a hyperlink exists, the mouse pointer turns into a black lightning bolt with a flash, and you see a pop-up tip with the name of the target. 2. Click a desired feature or location in your data frame to access hyperlink information. 3. This will bring up the hyperlink information, such as an HTML web page. If several hyperlinks are specified for a feature, ArcMap will pop up a list of the hyperlinks when the feature is clicked with the Hyperlink tool. 4. If you have hyperlinks turned on for multiple layers, clicking a location in your data frame provides a Hyperlinks dialog box to choose a feature from one of the layers. The layer name is listed in parentheses. Changing the hyperlink color for features You can use ArcMap settings to set the color for displaying hyperlink features using the following steps: 1. Click Customize > ArcMap Options. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Check When the Hyperlink tool is selected, highlight features containing clickable content. 4. Click the color drop-down menu to specify a different color for the highlights. Managing hyperlink paths As part of a map's properties, you can specify a hyperlink base, which is the base path, or URL, used for field-based hyperlinks to documents or URLs. For example, if the hyperlink base is set to D:\Data, then the values in the field or fields used as hyperlinks to documents don't have to contain D:\Data. They can just contain the name of the file. Using this property makes it easier to manage hyperlinks because if the location of the targets change, you can simply edit this one setting instead of having to edit each value of the field providing the hyperlink targets. The Hyperlink Base property is specified on the Map Document Properties dialog box. Click File > Map Document Properties to open. There is one Hyperlink Base property for the map document. This setting has no effect if you specify that the target values are to be sent to a macro. Also, this setting has no effect on dynamic hyperlinks. You can override this default so that no slash is automatically added. You can find this setting by launching the Advanced ArcMap Settings utility (<install drive>:\Program Files\ArcGIS\Desktop10.2.1\Utilities) and looking in the Miscellaneous tab. Overriding the default makes it easier to work with long paths and URLs. For example, if you want to use the hyperlink base setting with long URLs such as this one— http://www.example.com/index.cfm?parameter=1234—you have to specify http://www.example.com as the base and store everything that comes after that— index.cfm?parameter=1234—in the hyperlink field. But, by overriding the default, you can specify most of the URL as the base— http://www.example.com/index.cfm?parameter=— and just store the last part of the URL,1234, in the hyperlink field. If you override the default, ArcMap will still retain the slash if the hyperlink base specified in Map Document Properties ends in a slash character. So, if you override the default, you can still add a slash manually to the hyperlink base. The setting to override the default only applies to your machine and is not stored as a property in the map document you are working with. Making hyperlinks with relative paths Sometimes, you may want to give a map that contains hyperlinks to someone who does not have access to your network resources. Just as you can save the map with relative paths to the data, you can also specify hyperlinks that refer to a location relative to the map. To specify a path to a document in the same folder, type the document's name. For the example below, you would type directions.bmp (that is, do not include a \ or drive letter prefix). To specify a path through a folder immediately below the map's location in the file system, start the path with the folder name (again, no \ or drive letter prefix). For the example below, you would type Graphics\directions.bmp. Using parameters to control how a program opens a hyperlinked document Hyperlinks to documents can contain parameters that define how the program opens the document. For example, parameters can tell Adobe Reader to open a PDF to a specific page, allowing map features to hyperlink to different pages in the same document. Since each software package (such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, Adobe Reader, and so on) has unique commands, consult the documentation for the software package used to open the document for the parameters and syntax available to it. Many times, these parameters will be provided for use in a command line. For example, to open a .PDF document to page 5, the command line might look like the following: C:\Program Files\Adobe\Reader 8.0\Reader\AcroRd32.exe /A Page=5=OpenActions c:\temp\PopulationData.pdf where C:\Program Files\Adobe\Reader 8.0\Reader\AcroRd32.exe is the location of the software; /A Page=5=OpenActions is the open parameter; and c:\temp\PopulationData.pdf is the location of the file. ArcGIS does not read these parameters like a command line. Instead, it uses a special delimiter, a ? (question mark), to separate the file path from the parameter. The hyperlink to the same document and page in ArcGIS would look like this: c:\temp\PopulationData.pdf ?/A Page=5=OpenActions The ? serves as the delimiter between the path and the parameter. Advanced hyperlink functionality Field-based hyperlinks support system- and current user-level Windows environment variables when used with the Identify tool. Environment variables must be set on the computer prior to utilizing them for hyperlinks. To use environment variables within ArcGIS, you will need to qualify the variable with a dollar sign, not percentage signs. For example, use $VARTEST instead of %VARTEST%. You can create a dispatch object within your script code to call functions from a custom library. This allows you to access ArcObjects through your hyperlink script via the dispatch object. In addition, you can pass IFeature and/or IFeatureLayer down to the dispatch object so that you launch the hyperlink for the appropriate feature. An example of a hyperlink script that creates a dispatch object access ArcObjects through your hyperlink script via the dispatch object Function OpenLink ( {IFEATURE}, {IFEATURELAYER} ) Dim hlauncher Set hlauncher = CreateObject("Hyperlink_Lib.Launcher") hlauncher.Launch {IFEATURE}, {IFEATURELAYER} End Function This example will call the function Launch from a Hyperlink_Lib library that you have created. 5.15. Using the Time Slider tool Many GIS datasets contain a measure of time for each feature or raster, and you can use these temporal attributes to create, visualize, and work with time-aware layers. The most common method is to set time properties for a map layer and to use the Time Slider tool to visualize the layer at various points in time. For example, you might have recorded events by time such as animal tracking locations, crime events, disease cases, urban growth, weather patterns, storm tracks, and so on. You can also combine multiple time-aware layers in a common map display. Time properties for a layer You can enable time properties for a map layer on the Time tab on the Layer Properties dialog box. The Time Slider tool for map display Once you have enabled time for a layer, you can open the Time Slider tool on the Tools toolbar to visualize time-aware layers in your map document. You can use the time slider to view layers for various points in time or for events that fall within a time window. See What is temporal data? to learn more about working with time-aware layers. 5.16. Exporting features With ArcMap, you can export the data for a layer to another location or format or as a subset of the features from the original data source. ArcMap can write new data to either a shapefile or geodatabase. This data can include all the original data, a selected set of the features, or only the features visible in the map's current extent. ArcMap can also save the data so it uses the data frame's coordinate system or the coordinate system of a feature dataset in a geodatabase. When you export data, it can contain not only just the selected features but also only the features identified by the layer's definition query. If the layer is a selection layer, the definition of that selection layer will also be used. Note: ArcGIS for Desktop Basic users can export features to a shapefile, file geodatabase, or personal geodatabase, whileArcGIS for Desktop Standard and ArcGIS for Desktop Advanced users also have the option of exporting to an enterprise geodatabase. Exporting features to a new coordinate system When you export data from ArcMap, you can choose to create a new feature class using a different coordinate system than that of the source data, the coordinate system of the data frame or the coordinate system of the feature dataset to which you are exporting the data. When you export data to a feature dataset in a geodatabase, it will use the coordinate system of the feature dataset. If you export data as a stand-alone feature class or to a file-based data source, it will have the same coordinate system as the source data. With the Project geoprocessing tool, you can make a copy of your data, change its coordinate system, and transform the shapes in the data to use the new coordinate system. You can use the Project geoprocessing tool as part of a model or as you need it while working in ArcMap or ArcCatalog. If your data's geographic coordinate system uses a different datum from that of the new feature class, you will likely write spatially inaccurate data. Instead of directly writing to the new feature class, make a copy of the original feature class and use the Project geoprocessing tool to reproject that feature class to the coordinate system that you ultimately want to use. As part of using the Project geoprocessing tool, you will be able to specify a datum transformation. Once you have projected the copy, you can copy it into the new workspace and delete the first copy. This applies to any workspace in ArcMap or a geoprocessing tool that is able to write new data. Steps: 1. Right-click the layer in the table of contents and click Data > Export Data. 2. Click the Export arrow and click All features, Selected features, or All features in View Extent. 3. Click the option for the output coordinate system you want to use. 4. Click the browse button and navigate to a location to save the exported data. 5. Type the name for the output data source. 6. Click the Save as type arrow and choose the output type. 7. Click Save. 8. Click OK. Tip: If you choose to export data to a feature dataset, the options for choosing the coordinate system become unavailable, meaning you will be using the coordinate system from the feature dataset. When exporting from text file to shapefile format, the export may fail if the length of a record exceeds the supported length for .dbf files. 5.17. Query expressions in ArcGIS Building a query expression Query expressions are used in ArcGIS to select a subset of features and table records. Query expressions in ArcGIS adhere to standard SQL expressions. For example, you use this syntax using the Select By Attributes tool or with the Query Builder dialog box to set a layer definition query. This topic describes how to build basic WHERE clause expressions and is useful if you are just getting started with SQL. For a more detailed reference, see SQL reference for query expressions used in ArcGIS. A simple SQL expression SELECT * FROM forms the first part of the SQL expression and is automatically supplied for you. Query expressions use the general form that follows a Select * From <Layer or dataset> Where clause (for example, the part of the SQL expression that comes after SELECT * FROM <Layer_name> WHERE). Here is the general form for ArcGIS query expressions: <Field_name> <Operator> <Value or String> For compound queries, the following form is used: <Field_name> <Operator> <Value or String> <Connector> <Field_name> <Operator> <Value or String> ... Optionally, parentheses () can be used for defining the order of operations in compound queries. Because you are selecting columns as a whole, you cannot restrict the SELECT to return only some of the columns in the corresponding table because the SELECT * syntax is hard-coded. For this reason, keywords, such as DISTINCT, ORDER BY, and GROUP BY, cannot be used in an SQL query in ArcGIS except when using subqueries. See SQL reference for query expressions used in ArcGIS for information on subqueries. In most ArcGIS dialog boxes where you build a query expression, the name of the layer or table is supplied for you (or you select it from a drop-down list). For example: The next part of the expression is the WHERE clause, which is the part you must build. A basic SQL WHERE clause would look like STATE_NAME = 'Alabama' This would select the features containing "Alabama" in a field named STATE_NAME. SQL syntax The SQL syntax you use differs depending on the data source. Each DBMS has its own SQL dialect. To query file-based data, including file geodatabases, coverages, shapefiles, INFO tables, dBASE tables, and CAD and VPF data, you use the ArcGIS SQL dialect that supports a subset of SQL capabilities. To query personal geodatabases, you use the Microsoft Access syntax. To query an ArcSDE geodatabase, you use the SQL syntax of the underlying DBMS (that is, Oracle, SQL Server, DB2, Informix, or PostgreSQL). ArcGIS dialog boxes in which you create SQL WHERE clauses will help you use the correct syntax for the database you're querying. They list the proper field names and values with the appropriate delimiters. They also select the relevant SQL keywords and operators for you. Searching strings Strings must always be enclosed within single quotes. For example: STATE_NAME = 'California' Strings in expressions are case sensitive except when you're querying personal geodatabase feature classes and tables. To make a case-insensitive search in other data formats, you can use a SQL function to convert all values to the same case. For file-based data sources like file geodatabases or shapefiles, use either the UPPER or LOWER function. For example, the following expression will select customers whose last name is stored as either Jones or JONES: UPPER(LAST_NAME) = 'JONES' Other data sources have similar functions. Personal geodatabases, for example, have functions named UCASE and LCASE that perform the same operation. Use the LIKE operator (instead of the = operator) to build a partial string search. For example, this expression would select Mississippi and Missouri among U.S. state names: STATE_NAME LIKE 'Miss%' % means that anything is acceptable in its place: one character, a hundred characters, or no character. Alternatively, if you want to search with a wildcard that represents one character, use _. For example, this expression would find Catherine Smith and Katherine Smith: OWNER_NAME LIKE '_atherine smith' The wildcards above work for any file-based data or ArcSDE geodatabase. The wildcards you use to query personal geodatabases are * for any number of characters and ? for one character. Wildcard characters appear as buttons on the Select by Attributes and Query Builder dialog boxes. You can click the button to enter the wildcard into the expression you're building. Only the wildcard characters that are appropriate to the data source of the layer or table you are querying are displayed. If you use a wildcard character in a string with the = operator, the character is treated as part of the string, not as a wildcard. You can use greater than (>), less than (<), greater than or equal (>=), less than or equal (<=), and BETWEEN operators to select string values based on sorting order. For example, this expression will select all the cities in a coverage with names starting with the letters M through Z: CITY_NAME >= 'M' The not equal (<>) operator can also be used when querying strings. If the string contains a single quote you will first need to use another single quote as an escape character. For example: NAME = 'Alfie''s Trough' The NULL keyword You can use the NULL keyword to select features and records that have null values for the specified field. The NULL keyword is always preceded by IS or IS NOT. For example, to find cities whose 1996 population has not been entered, you can use POPULATION96 IS NULL Alternatively, to find cities whose 1996 population has been entered, you can use POPULATION96 IS NOT NULL Searching numbers You can query numbers using the equal (=), not equal (<>), greater than (>), less than (<), greater than or equal (>=), less than or equal (<=), and BETWEEN operators. For example POPULATION96 >= 5000 Numeric values are always listed using the point as the decimal delimiter regardless of your regional settings. The comma cannot be used as a decimal or thousands delimiter in an expression. Calculations Calculations can be included in expressions using the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /. Calculations can be between fields and numbers. For example: AREA >= PERIMETER * 100 Calculations can also be performed between fields. For example, to find the countries with a population density of less than or equal to 25 people per square mile, you could use this expression: POP1990 / AREA <= 25 Operator precedence Expressions are evaluated according to standard operator precedence rules. For example, the part of an expression enclosed in parentheses is evaluated before the part that isn't enclosed. The example HOUSEHOLDS > MALES * POP90_SQMI + AREA is evaluated differently from HOUSEHOLDS > MALES * (POP90_SQMI + AREA) You can either click to add parentheses and type the expression you want to enclose or highlight the existing expression that you want to enclose, then click theParentheses button to enclose it. Combining expressions Complex expressions can be built by combining expressions with the AND and OR operators. For example, the following expression would select all the houses that have more than 1,500 square feet and a garage for three or more cars: AREA > 1500 AND GARAGE > 3 When you use the OR operator, at least one side of the expression of the two separated by the OR operator must be true for the record to be selected. For example: RAINFALL < 20 OR SLOPE > 35 Use the NOT operator at the beginning of an expression to find features or records that don't match the specified expression. For example: NOT STATE_NAME = 'Colorado' NOT expressions can be combined with AND and OR. For example, this expression would select all the New England states except Maine: SUB_REGION = 'New England' AND NOT STATE_NAME = 'Maine' Subqueries A subquery is a query nested within another query and is supported by geodatabase data sources only. It can be used to apply predicate or aggregate functions or to compare data with values stored in another table. For example, this query would select only the countries that are not also listed in the table indep_countries: COUNTRY_NAME NOT IN (SELECT COUNTRY_NAME FROM indep_countries) For more information, see SQL reference for query expressions used in ArcGIS. Querying dates ArcGIS dialog boxes in which you create SQL WHERE clauses will help you use the correct data syntax for the database you're querying. Most of the time, you will only need to click the field, the operator, and the value to generate the proper syntax. SQL reference for query expressions used in ArcGIS This topic describes the elements of common queries used in selection expressions in ArcGIS. Query expressions in ArcGIS use common SQL syntax. Caution: SQL syntax does not work for calculating fields using Field Calculator. Fields To specify a field in an SQL expression, provide a delimiter if the field name would otherwise be ambiguous, such as if it were the same as an SQL reserved keyword. Since there are many reserved keywords, and new ones can be added in subsequent releases, a good practice is to always enclose a field name with a delimiter. Field name delimiters differ from DBMS to DBMS. If you're querying any file-based data, such as a file geodatabase, ArcSDE geodatabase data, or data in an ArcIMS feature class or image service sublayer, you can enclose field names in double quotes: "AREA" If you're querying personal geodatabase data, you can enclose fields in square brackets: [AREA] For personal geodatabase raster datasets, you should enclose field names in double quotes: "AREA" For File geodatabase data you can enclose your field names in double quotes, but it's generally not needed. AREA Strings Strings must always be enclosed in single quotes in queries. For example: STATE_NAME = 'California' Strings are case sensitive in expressions. For feature classes and tables, you can use the UPPER or LOWER function to set the case for a selection. For example: UPPER(STATE_NAME) = 'RHODE ISLAND' Strings are case insensitive for personal geodatabase feature classes and tables. If needed, you can use the UCASE and LCASE functions that are equivalent to UPPER or LOWER. If the string contains a single quote you will first need to use another single quote as an escape character. For example: NAME = 'Alfie''s Trough' The wildcards you use to conduct a partial string search also depend on the data source you are querying. For example, in a file-based or ArcSDE geodatabase data source, this expression would select Mississippi and Missouri among USA state names: STATE_NAME LIKE 'Miss%' The percent symbol (%) means that anything is acceptable in its place—one character, a hundred characters, or no character. The wildcards you use to query personal geodatabases are asterisk (*) for any number of characters and question mark (?) for one character. String functions can be used to format strings. For instance, the LEFT function would return a certain number of characters starting on the left of the string. In this example, the query would return all states starting with the letter A: LEFT(STATE_NAME,1) = 'A' Refer to the documentation of your DBMS for a list of supported functions. Numbers The decimal point (.) is always used as the decimal delimiter, regardless of your locale or regional settings. The comma cannot be used as a decimal or thousands delimiter in an expression. You can query numbers using the equal (=), not equal (<>), greater than (>), less than (<), greater than or equal to (>=), less than or equal to (<=), and BETWEEN operators. For example: POPULATION >= 5000 Numeric functions can be used to format numbers. For instance, the ROUND function would round a number to a given number of decimals in a file geodatabase: ROUND(SQKM,0) = 500 Refer to the documentation of your DBMS for a list of supported numeric functions. Dates and time General rules Geodatabase data sources store dates in a date-time field. However, ArcInfo coverages and shapefiles do not. Therefore, most of the query syntax listed below contains a reference to the time. In some cases, the time part of the query may be safely omitted if the field is known to contain only dates; in other cases, it needs to be stated, or the query will return a syntax error. The main purpose of the ArcMap date format is to store dates, not times. It is possible to store only a time in the field when the underlying database actually uses a date-time field, but it is not recommended. Querying against time is a bit awkward; for instance, 12:30:05 p.m. will be stored as '1899-12-30 12:30:05'. Note: Dates are stored in the underlying database as a reference to December 30, 1899, at 00:00:00. This is valid for all the data sources listed here. The purpose of this section is only to help you query against dates, not time values. When a nonnull time is stored with the dates (for instance, January 12, 1999, 04:00:00), querying against the date only will not return the record because when you pass only a date to a date-time field, it will fill the time with zeros and retrieve only the records where the time is 12:00:00 a.m. The attribute table shows date and time in a user-friendly format, depending on your regional settings, rather than the underlying database's format. This is fine most of the time but also has a few drawbacks: The string shown in the SQL query may only slightly resemble the value shown in the table, especially when time is involved. For instance, a time entered as 00:00:15 will show as 12:00:15 a.m. in the attribute table, with the United States as your regional settings, and the comparable query syntax would be Datefield = '1899-12-30 00:00:15'. The attribute table does not know what the underlying data source is until you save your edits. It will first try to format the value entered to fit its own format, then upon saving edits, it will try to tweak the resulting value to fit into the database. Because of this, you can enter a time in a shapefile, but you will find that it is dropped when you save your edits. The field will then contain a value '1899-12-30' that will show as 12:00:00 a.m. or something equivalent depending on your regional settings. Date-time syntax for ArcSDE geodatabases Informix Datefield = 'yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss' The hh:mm:ss part of the query cannot be omitted even if it's equal to 00:00:00. Oracle Datefield = date 'yyyy-mm-dd' Keep in mind this will not return records where the time is not null. An alternative format for querying dates in Oracle follows: Datefield = TO_DATE('yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss','YYYY-MM-DD HH24:MI:SS') The second parameter 'YYYY-MM-DD HH24:MI:SS' describes the format used for querying. An actual query would look like this: Datefield = TO_DATE('2003-01-08 14:35:00','YYYY-MM-DD HH24:MI:SS') You can use a shorter version: TO_DATE('2003-11-18','YYYY-MM-DD') Again, this will not return records where the time is not null. SQL Server Datefield = 'yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss' The hh:mm:ss part of the query can be omitted when the time is not set in the records. An alternative format is this: Datefield = 'mm/dd/yyyy' IBM DB2 Datefield = TO_DATE('yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss','YYYY-MM-DD HH24:MI:SS') The hh:mm:ss part of the query cannot be omitted even if the time is equal to 00:00:00. PostgreSQL Datefield = TIMESTAMP 'YYYY-MM-DD HH24:MI:SS' Datefield = TIMESTAMP 'YYYY-MM-DD' You must specify the full time stamp when using "equal to" queries, or else no records will be returned. You could successfully query with the following statements if the table you query contains date records with these exact time stamps (2007-05-29 00:00:00 or 2007-05-29 12:14:25): select * from table where date = '2007-05-29 00:00:00'; or select * from table where date = '2007-05-29 12:14:25'; If you use other operators, such as greater than, less than, greater than or equal to, or less than or equal to, you don't have to designate the time, although you can if you want to be that precise. Both of the following statements would work: select * from table where date < '2007-05-29'; select * from table where date < '2007-05-29 12:14:25'; File geodatabases, shapefiles, coverages, and other file-based data sources Dates in file geodatabases, shapefiles, and coverages are preceded with date. "Datefield" = date 'yyyy-mm-dd' File geodatabases support the use of a time in the date field, so this can be added to the expression: "Datefield" = date 'yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss' Shapefiles and coverages do not support the use of time in a date field. Note: All SQL used by the file geodatabase is based on the SQL-92 standard. Personal geodatabase Dates in personal geodatabases are delimited using a pound sign (#). For example: [Datefield] = #mm-dd-yyyy hh:mm:ss# It can be shortened to [Datefield] = #mm-dd-yyyy#. An alternative format [Datefield] = #yyyy/mm/dd# Known limitations Querying against a date on the left part (first table) of a join only works with file-based data sources, such as file geodatabases, shapefiles, and DBF tables. However, there is a possible workaround for working with non-file-based data, like personal geodatabase data and ArcSDE data as described below. Querying against a date on the left part of a join will be successful when using the limited version of SQL developed for file-based data sources. If you are not using such a data source, you can force the expression to use this format. This can be done by making sure that the query expression involves fields from more than one join table. For example, if a feature class and a table (FC1 and Table1) are joined and are both from a personal geodatabase, the following expressions will fail or return no data: FC1.date = date #01/12/2001# FC1.date = date '01/12/2001' To query successfully, you can create a query as follows: FC1.date = date '01/12/2001' and Table1.OBJECTID > 0 Since the query involves fields from both tables, the limited SQL version will be used. In this expression, Table1.OBJECTID is always > 0 for records that matched during join creation, so this expression is true for all rows that contain join matches. To ensure that every record with FC1.date = date '01/12/2001' is selected, use the following query: FC1.date = date '01/12/2001' and (Table1.OBJECTID IS NOT NULL OR Table1.OBJECTID IS NULL) This query will select all records with FC1.date = date '01/12/2001', whether or not there was a join match for each particular record. Subqueries Note: Coverages, shapefiles, and other nongeodatabase file-based data sources do not support subqueries. Subqueries that are performed on versioned ArcSDE feature classes and tables will not return features that are stored in the delta tables. File geodatabases provide the limited support for subqueries explained in this section, while personal and ArcSDE geodatabases provide full support. For information on the full set of subquery capabilities of personal and ArcSDE geodatabases, refer to your DBMS documentation. A subquery is a query nested within another query. It can be used to apply predicate or aggregate functions or to compare data with values stored in another table. This can be done with the IN or ANY keyword. For example, this query would select only the countries that are not also listed in the table indep_countries: "COUNTRY_NAME" NOT IN (SELECT "COUNTRY_NAME" FROM indep_countries) This query would return the features with a GDP2006 greater than the GDP2005 of any of the features contained in countries: "GDP2006" > (SELECT MAX("GDP2005") FROM countries) For each record in the table, a subquery may need to parse all the data in its target table. It may be extremely slow to execute on a large dataset. Subquery support in file geodatabases is limited to the following: IN predicate. For example: "COUNTRY_NAME" NOT IN (SELECT "COUNTRY_NAME" FROM indep_countries) Scalar subqueries with comparison operators. A scalar subquery returns a single value. For example: "GDP2006" > (SELECT MAX("GDP2005") FROM countries) For file geodatabases, the set functions AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and SUM can only be used within scalar subqueries. EXISTS predicate. For example: EXISTS (SELECT * FROM indep_countries WHERE "COUNTRY_NAME" = 'Mexico') Operators The following is the full list of query operators supported by file geodatabases, shapefiles, coverages, and other file-based data sources. They are also supported by personal and ArcSDE geodatabases, although these data sources may require different syntax. In addition to the operators below, personal and ArcSDE geodatabases support additional capabilities. Please see your DBMS documentation for details. Arithmetic operators You use an arithmetic operator to add, subtract, multiply, and divide numeric values. Operator Description * Arithmetic operator for multiplication / Arithmetic operator for division + Arithmetic operator for addition - Arithmetic operator for subtraction Arithmetic operators Comparison operators You use comparison operators to compare one expression to another. Operator Description < Less than. It can be used with strings (comparison is based on alphabetical order), numbers, and dates. <= Less than or equal to. It can be used with strings (comparison is based on alphabetical order), numbers, and dates. <> Not equal to. It can be used with strings (comparison is based on alphabetical order), numbers, and dates. > Greater than. It can be used with strings (comparison is based on alphabetical order), numbers, and dates. >= Greater than or equal to. It can be used with strings (comparison is based on alphabetical order), numbers, and dates. For example, this query selects all the cities with names starting with the letters M to Z: "CITY_NAME" >= 'M' [NOT] BETWEEN xAND y Selects a record if it has a value greater than or equal to x and less than or equal to y. When preceded by NOT, it selects a record if it has a value outside the specified range. For example, this expression selects all records with a value greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 10: "OBJECTID" BETWEEN 1 AND 10 This is the equivalent of the following expression: "OBJECTID" >= 1 AND OBJECTID <= 10 However, the expression with BETWEEN provides better performance if you're querying an indexed field. [NOT] EXISTS Returns TRUE if the subquery returns at least one record; otherwise, it returns FALSE. For example, this expression returns TRUE if the OBJECTID field contains a value of 50: EXISTS (SELECT * FROM parcels WHERE "OBJECTID" = 50) EXISTS is supported in file, personal, and ArcSDE geodatabases only. [NOT] IN Selects a record if it has one of several strings or values in a field. When preceded by NOT, it selects a record if it doesn't have one of several strings or values in a field. For example, this expression searches for four different state names: "STATE_NAME" IN ('Alabama', 'Alaska', 'California', 'Florida') For file, personal, and ArcSDE geodatabases, this operator can also be applied to a subquery: "STATE_NAME" IN (SELECT "STATE_NAME" FROM states WHERE "POP" > 5000000) IS [NOT] NULL Selects a record if it has a null value for the specified field. When NULL is preceded by NOT, it selects a record if it has any value for the specified field. For example, this expression selects all records with a null value for population: "POPULATION" IS NULL x [NOT] LIKE y[ESCAPE 'escape-character'] Use the LIKE operator (instead of the = operator) with wildcards to build a partial string search. For example, this expression selects Mississippi and Missouri among USA state names: "STATE_NAME" LIKE 'Miss%' The percent symbol (%) means that anything is acceptable in its place: one character, a hundred characters, or no character. Alternatively, if you want to search with a wildcard that represents one character, use an underscore (_). For example, this expression finds Catherine Smith and Katherine Smith: "OWNER_NAME" LIKE '_atherine Smith' The percent symbol and underscore wildcards work for any file-based data or multiuser geodatabase data. LIKE works with character data on both sides of the expression. If you need to access noncharacter data, use the CAST function. For example, this query returns numbers that begin with 8 from the integer field SCORE_INT: CAST ("SCORE_INT" AS VARCHAR) LIKE '8%' To include the percent symbol or underscore in your search string, use the ESCAPE keyword to designate another character as theescape character, which in turn indicates that a real percent sign or underscore immediately follows. For example, this expression returns any string containing 10%, such as 10% DISCOUNT or A10%: "AMOUNT" LIKE '%10$%%' ESCAPE '$' The wildcards you use to query personal geodatabases are asterisk (*) for any number of characters and question mark (?) for one character. The pound sign (#) is also used as a wildcard to match a single digit (numeric value). For example, this query returns parcel numbers A1, A2, and so on, from a personal geodatabase: [PARCEL_NUMBER] LIKE 'A#' Comparison operators Logical operators Operator Description AND Combines two conditions together and selects a record if both conditions are true. For example, the following expression selects any house with more than 1,500 square feet and a garage for more than two cars: "AREA" > 1500 AND "GARAGE" > 2 OR Combines two conditions together and selects a record if at least one condition is true. For example, the following expression selects any house with more than 1,500 square feet or a garage for more than two cars: "AREA" > 1500 OR "GARAGE" > 2 NOT Selects a record if it doesn't match the expression. For example, the following expression selects all states but California: NOT "STATE_NAME" = 'California' Logical operators String Operators Operator Description || Returns a character string that is the result of concatenating two or more string expressions together. FIRST_NAME || MIDDLE_NAME || LAST_NAME String operators Functions The following is the full list of functions supported by file geodatabases, shapefiles, coverages, and other file-based data sources. They are also supported by personal and ArcSDE geodatabases, although these data sources may require different syntax or function name. In addition to the functions below, personal and ArcSDE geodatabases support additional capabilities. See your DBMS documentation for details. Date functions Function Description CURRENT_DATE Returns the current date. EXTRACT(extract_fieldFROM extract_source) Returns the extract_field portion of the extract_source. The extract_source argument is a date-time expression. Theextract_field argument can be one of the following keywords: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, or SECOND. CURRENT TIME Returns the current time. Date functions String functions Arguments denoted asstring_exp can be the name of a column, a character-string-literal, or the result of another scalar function, where the underlying data type can be represented as a character type. Arguments denoted ascharacter_exp are variable-length character strings. Arguments denoted asstart or length can be a numeric-literal or the result of another scalar function, where the underlying data type can be represented as a numeric type. These string functions are 1-based; that is, the first character in the string is character 1. Function Description CHAR_LENGTH(string_exp) Returns the length in characters of the string expression. LOWER(string_exp) Returns a string equal to that in string_exp, with all uppercase characters converted to lowercase. POSITION(character_exp INcharacter_exp) Returns the position of the first character expression in the second character expression. The result is an exact numeric with an implementation-defined precision and a scale of zero. SUBSTRING(string_exp FROM startFOR length) Returns a character string that is derived from string_exp, beginning at the character position specified by startfor length characters. TRIM(BOTH | LEADING | TRAILINGtrim_character FROM string_exp) Returns the string_exp with the trim_character removed from the leading, trailing, or both ends of the string. UPPER(string_exp) Returns a string equal to that in string_exp, with all lowercase characters converted to uppercase. String functions Numeric functions All numeric functions return a numeric value. Arguments denoted as numeric_exp, float_exp, or integer_exp can be the name of a column, the result of another scalar function, or a numeric-literal, where the underlying data type could be represented as a numeric type. Function Description ABS(numeric_exp) Returns the absolute value of numeric_exp. ACOS(float_exp) Returns the arccosine of float_exp as an angle, expressed in radians. ASIN(float_exp) Returns the arcsine of float_exp as an angle, expressed in radians. ATAN(float_exp) Returns the arctangent of float_exp as an angle, expressed in radians. CEILING(numeric_exp) Returns the smallest integer greater than or equal to numeric_exp. COS(float_exp) Returns the cosine of float_exp, where float_exp is an angle expressed in radians. FLOOR(numeric_exp) Returns the largest integer less than or equal to numeric_exp. LOG(float_exp) Returns the natural logarithm of float_exp. LOG10(float_exp) Returns the base 10 logarithm of float_exp. MOD(integer_exp1, integer_exp2) Returns the remainder of integer_exp1 divided by integer_exp2. POWER(numeric_exp, integer_exp) Returns the value of numeric_exp to the power of integer_exp. ROUND(numeric_exp, integer_exp) Returns numeric_exp rounded to integer_exp places to the right of the decimal point. If integer_exp is negative, numeric_expis rounded to |integer_exp| places to the left of the decimal point. SIGN(numeric_exp) Returns an indicator of the sign of numeric_exp. If numeric_exp is less than zero, -1 is returned. If numeric_exp equals zero, 0 is returned. If numeric_exp is greater than zero, 1 is returned. SIN(float_exp) Returns the sine of float_exp, where float_exp is an angle expressed in radians. TAN(float_exp) Returns the tangent of float_exp, where float_exp is an angle expressed in radians. TRUNCATE(numeric_exp, integer_exp) Returns numeric_exp truncated to integer_exp places to the right of the decimal point. If integer_exp is negative, numeric_expis truncated to |integer_exp| places to the left of the decimal point. Numeric functions The CAST function The CAST function converts a value to a specified data type. The syntax is as follows: CAST(exp AS data_type) The argument exp can be the name of a column, the result of another scalar function, or a literal. Data_type can be any of the following keywords, which can be specified in upper- or lowercase: CHAR, VARCHAR, INTEGER, SMALLINT, REAL, DOUBLE, DATE, TIME, DATETIME, NUMERIC, or DECIMAL. For more information on the CAST function, see CAST and CONVERT. 6.Displaying layers